Home
User`s Manual - Toshiba Canada
Contents
1. we AM2 Approval by i iste tm 2 Fr 83 A034920 4 US AGSMDO1BATHENS 2 f gz x DANATEL 5 UAE EP 0182 05 2565 VS in SSZ z SW O EEn z 01 0789 834989 018 4 v S as zd SFAT iae wii E252809 tam Seo Complies with DC 3 3V 20mA Max Type Approved A 8 2 m IDA standard No ESD CPE 0400759 8 g g ost E ES DMIOUEE sSe0 appnoven User s Manual vii User s Manual Pursuant to FCC CFR 47 Part 68 When you are ready to install or use the modem call your local telephone company and give them the following information E The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem H The registration number that is located on the device The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the device which is to be installed or if already installed on the bottom of the computer outside of the main system label E The Ringer Equivalence Number REN of the modem which can vary For the REN of your modem refer to your modem s label The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack called the USOC RuJ11C Type of service Your modem is designed to be used on standard device telephone lines Connection to telephone company provided coin service central office implemented systems is prohibited Connection to party lines service is subject to s
2. notice Declaration of Conformity Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures E Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna E Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver E Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to this equipment Operation with non compliant peripherals or peripherals not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception Shielded cables must be used between the external devices and the computer s external monitor por
3. User s Manual 10 13 Troubleshooting USB device Refer also to your USB device s documentation Problem Procedure USB device does not Check for a firm cable connection between the work USB ports on the computer and the USB device Make sure the USB device drivers are properly installed Refer to your Windows XP documentation for information on checking the drivers If you are using an operating system that does not support USB you can still use a USB mouse and or USB keyboard If these devices do not work make sure the USB KB Mouse Legacy Emulation item in HW Setup is set to Enabled If problems persist contact your dealer Memory expansion Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices for information on installing memory modules Problem Procedure Beep sounds Make sure the memory module installed in the Two beeps a dash expansion slot is compatible with the computer and a dot fora If an incompatible module has been installed defective memory follow the steps below module in slot A 1 Turn off the power Three beeps a dash and two dots for slot B When both beeps Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral devices 3 Remove the battery pack sound both memories in slot A and B are 4 Remove the memory module defective 5 Install the battery pack and or connect the AC adaptor 6 Turn on the power If problems persist contact your dealer Sound system Refer also to document
4. E This PC contains rechargeable batteries After repeated use the batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need to replace them Under certain applicable laws and regulation it may be illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash 10 18 User s Manual Troubleshooting Please be kind to our shared environment Check with your local government authority for details regarding where to recycle old batteries or how to dispose of them properly This product contains mercury Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal reuse or recycling information please contact your local government If your hard disk or other storage media contains sensitive data you should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove data from the media These standard deletion procedures include HM Selecting Delete for a target file E Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin E Reformatting the media E Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD ROM The procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file management This makes the file invisible to the operating system but the data can still be read by specialized utilities If you dispose of the PC please delete all the data on its HDD Doing so prevents unauthorized use of such data To ensure your data is not used for unauthorized purposes
5. 0c cece eee ee 4 23 Sound System ssassn s000eee cr sete nena eee ee NEERA DARE 4 25 Volume Control 2 0 cee eee 4 25 Microphone level nunana anaana nunnana tee eee 4 25 SigmaTel Control Panel 0 c eee ee eee 4 25 Speaker configuration 2 0 00 cece eee 4 26 User s Manual xix Table of Contents MOOI ie cies ete tated ae a he ee ECEN EEE ea 4 27 Region selection 1 2 0 0 0 e eee eet 4 27 Properties menu 2 0 eee eee 4 28 SWNG oid ae RY eed Me cate ee leh E E dae 4 28 Modem Selection 0 000 cece eee teens 4 28 Dialing Properties 0 0 eee 4 28 CONNMECHNG eea eid dd eae heen Seba eee ee muha gles 4 28 DISCONMEGCUNGI yin Fie ne See eek ed ee Be ee ei 4 29 Wireless communications 00 cece eee eee nee eens 4 30 Wireless LAN 0 00 e eee eee ees 4 30 SECU MIL Yate ese eats etna etre eee tog caus te ance a cee ah eet la eas 4 31 Bluetooth wireless technology 0 eee eee eee 4 31 Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA 4 31 Wireless communication switch 002 eee eee eee 4 32 Wireless communication indicator 00 e eee eee 4 33 LAN ccc ecac se se ete ee ENAT eee ARENE NEES ESPERE NE RE 4 33 LAN cable types eee tenes 4 33 Connecting LAN cable 1 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 4 34 Disconnecting LAN cable 0 2 0 c eee eee eee 4 34 Cleaning the computer 00 0c e eee eee renee eee
6. Getting Started Creating the Optical Recovery Discs of QosmioPlayer pmi o pio pmi o You may use this image to create CD or DVD recovery discs using the following steps 1 Select either blank CDs or DVD media 2 The application will allow you to choose a type of media to create recovery CDs DVD including CD R CD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R and DVD RW Some media may not be compatible with the Optical Drive of your computer Please verify your Optical Drive supports the blank media you choose 3 Turn on your computer to open Windows XP RecordNow Basic for TOSHIBA is required to create the Recovery Discs Other disc writing software is not supported 4 Insert the first blank media into the tray of the Optical Drive 5 After Recovery Disc Creator starts select the type of media and the title you wish to copy to the media then click the Burn button If your Optical Drive can only write to CDs select CD as the Type on Recovery Disc Creator If your Optical Drive of your computer can write to either CD or DVDs select the one you are using as the Type on Recovery Disc Creator Restoring the preinstalled software A If preinstalled files are damaged use the Product Recovery Media to restore them To restore the operating system and all preinstalled software follow the steps below When you reinstall the Windows operating system the hard disk will be reformatted and all data will be lost 1 Lo
7. Index 6 User s Manual
8. Optional Devices 6 Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before pressing it down until the latches on either side snap into place T Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the locking tabs on the connector and insert the module into the connector firmly If you find it difficult to install the memory module gently prize the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger Ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and right hand edges the edges with the grooves in JN E Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury E Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems 7 Seat the memory module cover and secure it with one screw J Be sure that the cover is closed firmly Memory module cover Screw mA Figure 9 13 Seating the memory module cover 8 Install the battery pack Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6 Power for details 9 14 User s Manual Optional Devices 9 Turn your computer over 10 Turn the power on and make sure the added memory is recognized Click start click Control Panel clic
9. RPL Sets RPL as the protocol Keyboard Wake up on Keyboard When this feature is enabled and the computer is in Standby mode you can turn on the computer by pressing any key It is effective only for the internal keyboard and only when the computer is in standby mode Enabled Enables the Wake up on Keyboard function Disabled Disables the Wake up on Keyboard function Default CPU This function lets you set the CPU operating mode This option is displayed only for models with an Intel Core Duo Processor pmi o Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode This option lets you choose from the following settings Dynamically CPU power consumption and clock speed Switchable automatic switching function is enabled When the computer is in use CPU operation is automatically switched when necessary Default User s Manual 7 5 HW Setup i Always High CPU power consumption and clock speed automatic switching function is disabled The CPU always runs at its fastest speed Always Low CPU power consumption and clock speed automatic switching function is disabled The CPU always runs at low power consumption and low speed LAN Wake up on LAN This feature lets the computer s power be turned on when it receives a wake up signal from the LAN Enabled Enables Wake up on LAN Disabled Disables Wake up on LAN Default Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake up on LAN is enabled The Wake
10. The computer s operating capability and battery charge status are affected by the power conditions whether an AC adaptor is connected whether a battery is installed and what the charge level is for the battery Table 6 1 Power conditions Power on Battery fully e Operates charged LED Battery blue DC IN blue Battery partially Operates charged or no Quick Charge charge LED Battery orange DC IN blue No battery e Operates installed No charge e LED Battery off DC IN blue Power off no operation e LED Battery blue DC IN blue e Quick charge e LED Battery orange DC IN blue e No charge e LED Battery off DC IN blue Power AC Battery charge adaptor is above low not battery trigger connected point Battery charge is below low battery trigger point Battery charge is exhausted No battery installed Power indicators Table 6 1 Power conditions continued Power on Power off no operation e Operates LED Battery off DC IN off Operates e LED Battery flashes orange DC IN off Computer goes into Standby Mode and shuts down Cannot operate LED Battery off DC INoff As shown in the above table the Battery DC IN and Power indicators on the system indicator alert you to the computer s operating capability and battery charge status Battery indicator Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack The following indicator lights indicat
11. or E Do not recharge heat disassemble or short the battery or put it into a fire or flame E Do not use a battery whose recommended expiration date has been reached or which is completely discharged E Do not use different types of batteries or old and new batteries at the same time E Donot carry the battery together with metal necklaces hairpins or other metal accessories E When storing or disposing of used batteries make sure to put some insulation tape on their terminals and to avoid short circuits If these precautions are not followed heating fluid leakage or explosion may occur This may cause burns or personal injury If battery fluid gets on your skin or clothes wash immediately with clean water If battery fluid gets in your eyes rinse your eyes with clean water immediately and see a doctor Do not touch the battery fluid on instruments or devices with bare hands Wipe off with a cloth or paper towel 8 30 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Type of battery that can be used for the Remote Controller When the batteries shipped with the Remote Controller are discharged replace them with commercially available AA manganese batteries or AA alkaline batteries Other types or battery should not be used Installing the batteries 1 Open the battery cover on the back side of the Remote Controller Push the tab in the direction of the arrow
12. out Be sure to push the ExpressCard firmly and press the eject button again 4 Press the extended eject button to pop the card out slightly 5 Grasp the ExpressCard and draw it out ExpressCard ExpressCard eject button L gt Figure 9 4 Removing the ExpressCard 9 4 User s Manual Optional Devices Bridge media slot i This slot lets you insert SD card Memory Stick Pro xD picture card and MultiMediaCard This Bridge media slot supports the following cards SD card Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO xD picture card MultiMediaCard Precautions on using cards Please note that not all cards have been tested and verified to work correctly Therefore it is not possible to guarantee that all cards will operate properly SD card pmi o The computer is equipped with the Bridge media slot that can accommodate Secure Digital flash memory cards with various memory capacities SD cards let you easily transfer data from devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants that use SD card flash memory The cards have a high level of security and copy protection features Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury SD memory cards comply with SDMI Secure Digita
13. E The battery pack is a lithium ion battery which can explode if not properly replaced used handled or disposed of Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements E Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode Data is stored in RAM so if the computer loses power it will be lost When the computer is powered off in Standby Mode and the AC adaptor is not connected the battery pack supplies power to maintain data and programs in memory If the battery pack is completely discharged Standby Mode cannot function and the computer loses all information in memory E When the High capacity battery pack is connected to the computer do not hold on only to the High capacity battery pack when lifting the computer up The High capacity battery pack may separate from the computer causing it to fall and cause injuries Real Time Clock battery The Real Time Clock RTC battery provides power for the internal real time clock and calendar It also maintains the system configuration If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged the system loses this data and the real time clock and calendar stop working The following message appears when you turn on the power eS x x k RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent Press F1 key to set Date Time You can change the Real Time Clock setting by pressing F1 key Refer to
14. Microsoft Windows XP manual package Is preinstalled in some regions Instruction Manual for Safety amp Comfort End User License Agreement If any of the items are missing or damaged contact your dealer immediately i2 User s Manual Introduction Features The computer uses TOSHIBA s advanced Large Scale Integration LSI Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS technology extensively to provide compact size minimum weight low power usage and high reliability This computer incorporates the following features and benefits Processor Built in The computer is equipped with one of the following Intel processor Intel Core Duo Processor which incorporates a 2MB level2 cache memory It also supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology Some models of the computers carry Inte Centrino Duo Mobile Technology which is based on three separate technologies of Intel Core Duo processor Intel PRO Wireless Network Connection and Mobile Intel 945 Express Chipset Family pmi o Legal Footnote CPU 1 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding CPU please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 1 Memory Slots The slot accepts a 256 512 1 024 or 2 048 MB memory module 256 512 1 024 or 2 048 MB memory modules can be installed in the two memory slots for a maximum of 4 096 MB system memory Legal Footnote Memory Main System 2 For more
15. This equipment uses a frequency of 2 4 GHz 2 FH This equipment uses FH SS modulation 3 1 The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m 4 This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from 2 400 MHz to 2 483 5 MHz It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object identification systems H 6 User s Manual Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability 3 TOSHIBA Direct PC Monday Friday 10 00 17 00 Toll Free Tel 0120 15 1048 Direct Dial 03 3457 4850 FAX 03 3457 4868 Device Authorization This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval and it belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low power data communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications Business Law The Name of the radio equipment EYXF3CS JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Approval Number D05 0074001 The following restrictions apply Do not disassemble or modify the device Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device User s Manual H 7 Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability H 8 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix AC Power Cord and Connectors The power cord s AC input plug must be compatible with the various international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for the country region in which it is used All cords must meet the following specifications Length Minimum 2 meters
16. This feature may not function with some software 4 2 User s Manual Operating Basics Action Buttons The action buttons are divided into a top row and a bottom row of 3 buttons each and are assigned the following functions Email ConfigFree Print This button will start the user s default email program Tapping on this zone will start the application and then switch the Touch Pad to Pointing Mode since the user will want to use the application they just launched This button will start Toshiba s ConfigFree application Tapping on this zone will start the application and then switch the Touch Pad to Pointing Mode since the user will want to use the application they just launched Tapping this button will open the currently active window s print menu This feature may not function with some software Application 1 2 3 Tapping on this zone will launch the program or action currently assigned to this zone If no action is configured tapping on this zone will bring up the configuration dialog box Refer to the Synaptics Touch Pad Properties section in this chapter User s Manual 4 3 Operating Basics Synaptics Touch Pad Properties There are 2 ways to set the Synaptics Touch Pad Properties The first is to use the Synaptics Touch Pad Properties window To open the window click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Utilities and click Synaptics
17. User s Manual Introduction System automatic Standby Hibernation Keypad overlay Power on password Instant security Intelligent power supply Battery save mode Panel power on off Low battery automatic hibernation Heat dispersal This feature automatically shuts down the system into Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode when there is no input or hardware access for a time specified You can specify the time and select either System Standby or System Hibernation in the System standby and System item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver A ten key pad is integrated into the keyboard Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5 The Keyboard for instructions on using the keypad overlay Two levels of password security supervisor and user are available to prevent unauthorized access to your computer A hot key function blanks the screen and disables the computer providing data security A microprocessor in the computer s intelligent power supply detects the battery s charge and calculates the remaining battery capacity It also protects electronic components from abnormal conditions such as voltage overload from an AC adaptor You can monitor remaining battery capacity by using the Battery remaining item in TOSHIBA Power Saver This feature lets you save battery power You can specify the Power Save Mode in the Profile item in TOSHIBA Power Saver This feature turns power to the comput
18. 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT WN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes Vertical frequency Hz B 6 User s Manual Display Controller and Modes Table 3 Video modes WUXGA E Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor J E The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases Resolution LCD CRT Vertical colors colors frequency Hz 640 x 480 256 256K 256 256K 60 800 x 600 256 256K 256 256K 60 1024 x 768 256 256K 256 256K 60 1280 x 1024 256 256K 256 256K 60 1600 x 1200 256 256K 256 256K 60 1920 x 120071 256 256K 256 256K 7 85 1920 x 1440 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 75 85 2048 x 1536 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 75 1 The 1920 x 1200 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT WN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes User s Manual B 7 Display Controller and Modes Table 3 Video modes WUXGA continued 1 E Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor E The screen may not be displayed properly in hi
19. After going through many charge and discharge cycles the battery will lose its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries To purchase a new battery pack see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer 11 2 User s Manual Legal Footnotes HDD Drive Capacity LCD 1 Gigabyte GB means 10 1 000 000 000 bytes using powers of 10 The computer operating system however reports storage capacity using powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB 2 1 073 741 824 bytes and therefore shows less storage capacity Available storage capacity will also be less if the product includes one or more pre installed operating systems such as Microsoft Operating System and or pre installed software applications or media content Actual formatted capacity may vary Over a period of time and depending on the usage of the computer the brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate This is an intrinsic characteristic of LCD technology Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode The screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen Graphics Processor Unit GPU 6 Graphics processor unit GPU performance may vary depending on product model design configuration applications power management settings and features utilized GPU performa
20. E Soaked or swollen finger e g after taking bath E Injured finger E Wet finger E Soiled or oily finger E Extremely dry skin condition on finger Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate Enroll two or more fingers Enroll additional fingers if recognition failure occurs often using enrolled fingers Check your finger condition Changed conditions such as injured rough extremely dry wet soiled dirty oily soaked swollen fingers may lower the recognition success rate Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes thinner or fatter the recognition success rate may be lowered The fingerprint for each finger is different and unique Please ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are used for identification Check sliding position and speed see the drawing below 4 6 User s Manual Operating Basics How to Delete the Fingerprint Data Saved fingerprint data is stored in the Non volatile memory inside the fingerprint sensor If you hand over the PC to others or dispose of it to do the following operations is recommended 1 Click start point to All Programs point to Protector Suite QL and click Control Center The Protector Suite Software screen is displayed Click Fingerprints and click Delete Click Settings and click Fingerprint Storage Inspector The Fingerprint Storage Inspector screen is displayed If other fingerp
21. Guide Numbers Enter ENTER CLEAR TOSHIBA Figure 8 15 Remote Controller 8 18 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Power Access indicator My TV My music My pictures My videos Record Stop Pause Play REW Rewind FWD Fast Forward Starts or terminates the operating system This button functions like the Power button of your computer By default the Standby mode is equivalent to the Power Off state of your computer To change the setting click start select Control panel gt Performance and Maintenance gt TOSHIBA Power Saver gt Setup Action gt Manual Setup The following five options are available No action Ask me what to do Standby Hibernate and Shut down This indicator will glow while the remote control is sending signals to the computer Please note that this indicator will not light after the battery has been completely discharged The My TV menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My music menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My pictures menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My videos menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activ
22. Operating time decreases at low temperatures The condition of the battery terminals Make sure the battery terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before installing the battery pack Retaining data with power off When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries the batteries retain data for the following approximate time periods Retention Time Battery type State and Retention Time Battery pack 4700mAh about 3 days Standby mode about 30 days Boot mode High Capacity Battery Pack 7050mAh about 5 days Standby mode about 50 days Boot mode RTC battery 30 days Extending battery life To maximize the life of your battery pack E Atleast once a month disconnect the computer from a power source and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges Before doing so follow the steps below User s Manual 6 11 Power 1 Turn off the computer s power 2 Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer s power If it does not turn on go to step 4 3 Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes If the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged If the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low battery go to step 4 4 Connect the AC adaptor to the computer and the power cord to a power outlet The DC IN indicator should glow blue and
23. PAL data to external devices Refer to TV section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices This D Video out port lets you transfer 525i 480i 525p 480p 1125i 1080i or 750p 720p data to external devices Refer to 7V section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices HDMI out port can connect with Type A connector HDMI cable One HDMI cable can send and receive video audio and control signals User s Manual 1 7 The computer is equipped with either an HDMI or D Video out port Headphone S PDIF jack Headphone jack Microphone jack Built in TV Tuner Infrared receiver window Remote Controller Remote control receiver Communications Modem LAN This jack lets you connect digital speakers or a stereo headphone 16 ohm minimum When you connect a digital soeaker or headphones the internal speaker is automatically disabled This jack can be used also as S PDIF jack and enables connection of optical digital correspondence apparatus A3 5 mm mini headphone jack enables connection of stereo headphones A3 5 mm mini microphone jack enables connection of a three conductor mini jack for monaural microphone input Media Center is started and My TV is select from a list This is a sensor window that receives signals from the Remote Controller which is provided with your computer This supports only Qosmio Player Use this device to watch TV or play CD DVD Its type and functions may depend on the model
24. Revision A B or G E Theoretical maximum speed 54 Mbps IEEE802 11a 802 119 E Theoretical maximum speed 11 Mbps IEEE802 11b E Frequency Channel Selection 5 GHz Revision A 2 4 GHz Revision B G E Roaming over multiple channels E Card Power Management E Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP data encryption based on 152 bit encryption algorithm Atheros module type E Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP data encryption based on 128 bit encryption algorithm Intel module type E Advanced Encryption Standard AES data encryption based on 256 bit encryption algorithm E Wi Fi Protected Access WPA E Wake up on Wireless LAN Intel module type The numerical values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless LAN standards The actual values may differ The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment obstacles access point design and configuration and client design and software hardware configurations The Transmit Rate at X Mbit s is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802 11 a b g standard The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed The Wake on Wireless function is effective only when it is connected with AP This function becomes invalid when the connection is cut User s Manual 1 9 Introduction Legal Footnote Wireless LAN 7 For m
25. Standby When you press Fn F3 the computer enters Standby To avoid entering Standby unexpectedly a dialog box appears for verification However if you select the check box it will not appear in the future As Hibernation When you press Fn F4 the computer enters Hibernation To avoid entering Hibernation unexpectedly a dialog box appears for verification However if you select the check box it will not appear in the future dA Display selection Press Fn F5 to change the active display device When you press these hot keys a dialog box appears Only selectable devices will be displayed Hold down Fn and press F5 again to change the device When you release Fn and F5 the selected device will change If you hold down these hot keys for five seconds the selection will return to LCD 5 4 User s Manual The Keyboard Asa Internal LCD screen Brightness Pressing Fn F6 decreases the display brightness in decrements When you press these hot keys the current setting will be displayed for two seconds by a pop up icon You can also change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Aa Internal LCD screen Brightness Pressing Fn F7 increases the display brightness in increments When you press these hot keys the current setting will be displayed for two seconds by a pop up icon You can also change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Bas
26. The battery pack could overheat and ignite Leakage of the caustic alkaline solution or other electrolytic substances could cause fire possibly resulting in death or serious injury 3 Never short circuit the battery pack by either accidentally or intentionally bringing the battery terminals in contact with another conductive object This could cause serious injury or a fire and could also damage the battery pack Always wrap the battery pack in plastic or place it ina plastic bag whenever transporting it to avoid exposing the terminals to another conductive object which could result in serious injury Always cover the metal terminals with insulating tape when disposing of the battery pack to prevent accidental short circuiting which could result in serious injury 4 Never drive a nail or any other sharp object into the battery pack hit battery pack with a hammer or other object or step on it Doing so could cause a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury 5 Never charge the battery pack by a method other than as instructed in the User s Manual Doing so could cause a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury 6 Never connect the battery pack to a plug socket or a car cigarette plug socket The battery pack could rupture or ignite causing a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury 7 Never allow a battery pack to become wet A wet battery pack will overheat or ignite causing rupture or fire
27. User s Manual S registers Sl 52 953 S4 Ring counter This register is read only The value of S1 is incremented with each ring If no ring occurs over a six second interval this register is cleared Range 0 225 Default 0 Units rings AT escape character user defined This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape sequence The default is the character The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode when on line Values greater than 127 disable the escape sequence Range 0 255 ASCII decimal Default 43 Units ASCII Command line termination character user defined This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return character This character is used to end command lines and result codes Range 0 127 ASCII decimal Default 13 carriage return Units ASCII Response formatting character user defined This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed character The modem uses a line feed character in command mode when it responds to the computer Range 0 127 ASCII decimal Default 10 line feed Units ASCII D 2 User s Manual S registers S5 Command line editing character user defined This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and pertains to asynchronous only The modem will not recognize the backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32 ASCII This character can be
28. Wire size Minimum 0 75 mm2 Current rating Minimum 2 5 amperes Voltage rating 125 or 250 VAC depending on country region s power standards Certification agencies U S and Canada UL listed and CSA certified No 18 AWG Type SVT or SPT 2 two conductors Australia AS Japan DENANHO Europe Austria OVE Italy IMQ Belgium CEBEC The Netherlands KEMA Denmark DEMKO Norway NEMKO Finland FIMKO Sweden SEMKO User s Manual AC Power Cord and Connectors France LCIE Switzerland SEV Germany VDE United Kingdom BSI In Europe two conductors power cord must be VDE type HO5VVH2 F or HO3VVH2 F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type HO5VV F For the United States and Canada two pin plug configuration must be a 2 15P 250V or 1 15P 125V and three pin plug configuration must be 6 15P 250V or 5 15P 125V as designated in the U S National Electrical code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part Il The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U S A and Canada the United Kingdom Australia and Europe USA and Canada United Kingdom UL approved BS approved Australia Europe AS approved Approved by the Canada appropriate agency CSA approved User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix J Usage Restrictions This appendix describes the Usage Restrictions E This configuration is designed to work with a signal from a conventional
29. causing damage to the PC or possibly injury Never leave the power to your PC on continuously for more than 24 hours Turn the power off when this product is not in use Always avoid abrupt changes of temperature or humidity Never place close to heat radiating appliances such as a heater Never place close to corrosive chemicals Never place close to magnetic field radiating appliances such as a stereo speaker Always place this product on a flat surface Provide a sufficient space behind the PC to allow easy adjustment of the display panel Always provide sufficient space around the PC to ensure adequate ventilation Always provide sufficient space for operating a mouse and other peripheral devices Placement of the computer Position the computer and peripheral devices to provide comfort and safety Position your LCD display panel or place your monitor in an appropriate position to help reduce awkward postures and overhead glare For example H Position LCD directly in front of you and at a comfortable distance away E Position LCD so the top of the screen is at or slightly below eye level A display screen that is too high or too low can cause awkward postures and possibly fatigue muscles that support the head E Rest your eyes periodically by focusing on objects that are farther away If you use a paper holder set it at about the same height and distance as the computer User s Manual 3 3 Getting Starte
30. or high LO Low volume L1 Low volume Same as L0 L2 Medium volume default L3 High volume Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 ERROR Otherwise Monitor speaker mode This command turns the speaker on or off MO The speaker is off M1 The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal default M2 The speaker is always on when modem is off hook M3 Speaker is on until the carrier is detected except when dialing Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 ERROR Otherwise User s Manual C 3 AT Commands Nn Modulation handshake This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the communication speed of the two modems is different NO When originating or answering this is for handshake only at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB command N1 When originating or answering begin the handshake at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB command default During handshake a lower transmission speed may be selected Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise On Return on line to data mode o0 Instructs the modem to exit on line command mode and return to data mode see AT escape sequence 01 This command issues a retrain before returning to on line data mode O3 This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to on line data mode Result Codes OK n 0 1 3 ERROR Otherwise
31. real time clock SCSI small computer system interface SIO serial input output SXGA super extended graphics array plus TFT thin film transistor UART universal asynchronous receiver transmitter USB Universal Serial Bus VESA Video Electronic Standards Association VGA video graphics array VRT voltage reduction technology WXGA wide extended graphics array plus WUXGA wide ultra extended graphics array XGA extended graphics array A adaptor A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar electronic devices For example the AC adaptor modifies the power from a wall outlet for use by the computer This term also refers to the add in circuit cards that control external devices such as video monitors and magnetic tape devices allocate To assign a space or function for a specific task alphanumeric Keyboard characters including letters numbers and other symbols such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols alternating current AC Electric current that reverses its direction of flow at regular intervals Glossary 2 User s Manual Glossary analog signal A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and frequency vary in proportion to are an analog of the value to be transmitted Voice communications are analog signals ANSI American National Standards Institute An organization established to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines For example ANSI defi
32. screen Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to operate as multiple virtual machines The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel Virtualization Technology The Enabled command allows use of the Intel Virtualization Technology Enabled Enables Virtualization Technology Disabled Disables Virtualization Technology Default 7 10 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front Operation button and QosmioPlayer This chapter explains how to use the Remote Controller on Windows XP Media Center Edition models as well as provides information about QosmioPlayer The state where Windows XP is active is referred to as Windows mode whereas the state where QosmioPlayer is active is referred to as QosmioPlayer mode pmi o Windows XP Media Center Edition gt My TV has been preinstalled on the MCE model Do not install other TV J viewing software such as WinDVR If installed it will not operate Windows XP Media Center Edition has the following function m Watch TV or a DVD movie E Pause rewind and fast forward TV programs using the Media Center time shifting feature Watch an instant replay Play back your digital videos View your digital pictures or play them as a slide show Browse select and play music CDs and DVD movies E Update the Television Program Guide from the Internet When the Media Center is going to be used be sure that
33. select a mode and a sharpness level Modes There are the following three modes E Dynamic Users can enjoy videos in a bright and exciting way E Standard Users can enjoy videos in their room in a relaxed way M Theater Users can enjoy videos as if they were in a theater in their dimly lit room Two sharpness levels are available ON and OFF with the Image sharpness being emphasized if ON is selected 8 32 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Restrictions of the QosmioEngine The current mode will be maintained and should be restored the next time the computer is switched on and after the notebook returns from Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode pmi o QosmioEngine is available only for the LCD and has the following restrictions QosmioEngine does not support LCD CRT CRT TV LCD TV and Multi Monitor Depending the video being played noise may be present When WinDVD uses pre installation The QosmioEngine is active when using the QosmioPlayer TV or the QosmioPlayer DVD External display output CRT S Video out may not be supported Text will be displayed in low quality while video is being played through WinDVD or Software for TV The QosmioEngine allows the computer to clearly display video images while trading this off against the rendering of lower quality static data such as captions Noise contained in original video images may increase when playing th
34. the computer for data input output TFT display A liquid crystal display LCD made from an array of liquid crystal cells using active matrix technology with thin film transistor TFT to drive each cell Touch Pad A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer palm rest TTL Transistor transistor logic A logic circuit design that uses switching transistors for gates and storage U Universal Serial Bus This serial interface lets you communicate with several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the computer V VGA Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets you run any popular software volatile memory Random access memory RAM that stores information as long as power is supplied to the computer W warm start Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off User s Manual Glossary 13 Glossary window A portion of the screen that can display its own application document or dialog box Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows window Wireless LAN Local Area Network LAN through wireless communication write protection A method for protecting a floppy disk from accidental erasure Glossary 14 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Index A AC adaptor 1 4 2 16 additional 1 16 connecting 3 6 DC IN 15V jack 2 6 ASCII characters 5 8 B Battery charging 6 8 extending battery life 6 11 indicator 2 12 6 2 Monitoring capacity 6 10 re
35. this product or for any business profit loss or business interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded contents E Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or software Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives you may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or problems with hardware devices Also it is a good idea to make two or more copies of important data in case of undesired change or loss of the recorded contents Before writing or rewriting E Based on TOSHIBA s limited compatibility testing we suggest the following manufacturers of CD R RW and DVD R R RW RW RAM disc However in no event does TOSHIBA guarantee the operation quality or performance of any disc Disc quality can affect write or rewrite success rates 4 14 User s Manual Operating Basics CD R TAIYO YUDEN CO LTD MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co Ltd CD RW Multi Speed and High Speed MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co Ltd CD RW Ulira Speed MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION DVD R DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2 0 TAIYO YUDEN CO LTD Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd DVD R DL MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION DVD R MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co Ltd DVD R DL Double Layer Recordable drive only MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION DVD RW DVD Specif
36. to open the cover Battery cover Tab Figure 8 17 Opening the battery cover 2 Insert the batteries in place Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities and in the correct position Batteries Figure 8 18 Inserting the batteries 3 Close the battery cover Close the cover securely until it clicks Battery cover Figure 8 19 Closing the battery cover User s Manual 8 31 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Replacing the batteries When the batteries in the Remote Controller reach the end of their life the Remote Controller may not operate correctly or work only within a short distance from your computer In this instance you should purchase new batteries and replace the discharged ones 1 Open the battery cover on the back side of the Remote Controller 2 Replace the batteries Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities and in the correct position Batteries Figure 8 20 Removing the batteries 3 Close the battery cover Close the cover securely until it clicks QosmioEngine You are able to enjoy vivid and striking visuals through the full screen capability of WinDVD and the QosmioEngine feature of QosmioPlayer Users can select from three video quality modes depending on their preferences for watching videos A dedicated utility TOSHIBA Picture Enhancement Utility running on Windows is developed to allow users to
37. 10 Closing the battery cover User s Manual 8 13 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Replacing the batteries When the batteries in the Remote Controller reach the end of their life the Remote Controller may not operate correctly or work only within a short distance from your computer In this instance you should purchase new batteries and replace the discharged ones 1 Open the battery cover on the back side of the Remote Controller 2 Replace the batteries Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities and in the correct position Batteries Figure 8 11 Removing the batteries 3 Close the battery cover Close the cover securely until it clicks Watching the TV Activating Media Center for the first time 1 Activate Media Center The setup screen appears Configure settings according to your environment Follow the screen instructions and configure settings according to the environment used Changing settings Refer to the following procedures to change settings that are already configured 1 Activate Media Center 2 Click in the following order Settings gt TV gt Set Up TV Signal 3 Click Yes for the TV SIGNAL SETUP message 4 Follow the screen instructions and configure settings according to the environment used F Image data cannot be imported edited watched or saved to DVD by J connecting the Media Center Edition model to e
38. 16 bit 60 Hertz HDMI A HDMI monitor can be connected to the HDMI out port on the computer To connect monitor follow the steps below 7 As the port operation of all HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface l monitors has not been confirmed some HDMI monitors may not function properly 1 Plug one end of the HDMI out cable into the HDMI out port of the HDMI device HDMI out port Figure 9 23 Connecting the HDMI out port F The computer is equipped with either an HDMI or D Video out port 2 Plug the other end of the HDMI out cable into the HDMI out port on your computer User s Manual 9 23 Optional Devices Settings for display video on HDMI To view video on the HDMI device be sure to configure the following settings otherwise you may find that nothing is displayed E Be sure to use the Fn F5 HotKey to select the display device before starting to play video Do not change the display device while playing video E Do not change the display device under the following conditions E While data is being read or written E While communication is being carried out If a HDMI is connected to the computer set the HDMI out format in Display Properties Follow the steps below 1 Click start and click Control Panel 2 Double click the Display icon to open the Display Properties window 3 Click the Settings tab and click the Advanced button 4 Click the GeForce Go 7300 tab or GeForce Go 7600 tab and cli
39. 2472 When installing Wireless LAN cards the channel configuration is managed as follows E For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure the Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point When roaming between different access points the station can dynamically switch to another channel if required For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a peer to peer mode the card will use the default channel 10 In a Wireless LAN Access Point the Wireless LAN card will use the factory set default channel printed in bold unless the LAN Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the Wireless LAN Access Point device Wireless IEEE 802 11 Channels Sets Revision A Frequency Range 5150 5850 MHz Note Channel ID 36 5180 40 5200 44 5220 48 5240 52 5260 56 5280 60 5300 User s Manual F 3 Wireless LAN 64 5320 100 5500 104 5520 108 5540 112 5560 116 5580 120 5600 124 5620 128 5640 132 5660 136 5680 140 5700 149 5745 153 5765 157 5785 161 5805 165 5825 1 Factory set default channels 2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries Regions for use for the countries regions that in which these channels can be used 3 Available Area US USA CANADA only F 4 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix G TOSHIBA RAID TOSHIBA RAID provides the RAID function 2 hard di
40. 3 Specifications A 4 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix B Display Controller and Modes Display controller The display controller interprets software commands into hardware commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off As indicated below there are two types of LCD Internal Panels Various video modes can be displayed on each LCD Internal panel Refer to the table on the next page which describes in detail supported video modes E 17 WXGA 1440 horizontal x 900 vertical pixels E 17 WUXGA 1920 horizontal x 1200 vertical pixels Because of the LCD s increased resolution lines may appear broken in DOS mode pmi o A high resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display up to 2048 horizontal and 1536 vertical pixels at 16 M colors The display controller also controls the video mode which uses industry standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed on screen Software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that supports the mode The computer s display controller supports all VGA and SVGA modes the most widely used industry standards Video modes The computer supports video modes defined in the tables below If your application offers a selection of mode numbers that do not match the numbers on the table select a mode based on mode type resolution character matrix number of colors and refresh rate
41. 3 Special features 00 c cece eee eee eee eee 1 10 Utilities 2 eee eves cade a tenes eee ee eee ore ee 1 12 OplIONS 252 0 eee ii cedee eens peed hee eeee ede EE cee ee ee 1 16 The Grand Tour Front with the display closed 0 cece eee eee eee 2 1 Leftside c iiaccicewss ni ete a senate eaat 2 3 Right Side 2 0 cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 5 Back Side mesis te asira tea ivas war aA e sae ae ced ete 2 6 Underside 0 c cece cee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 8 User s Manual Table of Contents Front with the display open 1 2 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 2 9 System indicators 0 c eee eee 2 12 Keyboard indicators 0 0 0 0 cece eee 2 13 Optical Disk Drives 0 c eee eee eee 2 14 Region codes for DVD drives and media 2 14 Writable discS 00 00 ccc eee 2 14 CDS2 ta haces noes ete bene a baa eae s aes 2 15 DVDS cence ied eed Soe 3 oe ee eee ieee ke oe 2 15 Formatai 6s Qacul aa AE eae Pe eda eho ee ae 2 15 DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer 000 2 15 AC adaptor ersa coe cere eee eves eked eels wee ees 2 16 Getting Started Setting up your work Space 0002 c eee eee 3 1 General conditions 00 cece eee eee 3 2 Placement of the computer 0 00 e eee eee ee 3 3 Seating and posture 0 0 0 cect eee 3 4 LIQHUNG cfine sAccok a eee eke pi Malema ache de Meee Be 3 5 Work NabitS ic
42. 4 22 floppy disks 4 22 SD card 9 7 Memory 1 3 expansion 1 16 9 12 installing 9 13 problems 10 14 removing 9 15 Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro 9 7 inserting 9 8 problems 10 10 removing 9 8 Modem 1 8 4 27 connecting 4 28 disconnecting 4 29 jack 2 5 properties menu 4 28 region selection 4 27 Moving the computer 4 35 MultiMediaCard 9 10 care 9 12 inserting 9 10 problems 10 11 removing 9 11 P Password power on 1 11 problems 10 6 starting the computer by 6 15 supervisor 6 15 user 6 14 PC card 1 7 9 2 inserting 9 2 problems 10 9 removing 9 3 Ports 1 6 External monitor 1 6 i LINK 1 7 USB 1 7 Power button location 2 9 conditions 6 1 hibernation mode 3 13 indicator 6 3 panel power on off 1 11 6 16 shut down mode Boot mode 3 10 standby mode 3 11 system auto off 6 16 turning off 3 10 turning on 3 9 Power up modes 6 16 Problems AC power 10 5 analyzing 10 2 Battery 10 5 Bluetooth 10 17 DVD Super Multi drive 10 8 ExpressCard 10 10 External Monitor 10 15 Fingerprint Sensor 10 13 Hard disk drive 10 8 Hardware and system checklist 10 3 i LINK IEEE1394 device 10 18 Infrared receiver window 10 11 Internal LCD display panel 10 7 Keyboard 10 7 LAN 10 16 Memory expansion 10 14 User s Manual Index 3 Index Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro 10 10 Modem 10 15 MultiMediaCard 10 11 Overheating power down 10 4 Password 10 6 PC card 10 9 Pointing device 10 12 Power 10 4 Real Time Clock 10
43. 6 SD card 10 10 Self test 10 4 Sound system 10 14 System start up 10 3 TV output signal 10 17 USB device 10 14 USB floppy disk drive 10 9 Video Playback 10 18 Wireless LAN 10 16 xD picture card 10 11 Processor 1 3 Q QosmioEngine 8 32 QosmioPlayer 8 16 R RecordNow 1 14 4 17 Remote control receiver 8 9 Remote Controller 8 5 S SD card 9 5 care 9 7 formatting 9 5 inserting 9 6 removing 9 6 Security lock attaching 9 28 Soft keys emulating keys on enhanced key board 5 2 Enter 5 3 right Ctrl key 5 3 ScrLock 5 3 Sound System 1 7 4 25 headphone jack 1 8 2 4 microphone jack 1 8 2 4 mute hot keys 5 3 Stereo speakers 2 10 Volume control 2 11 Sound system headphone jack 1 8 2 4 Standby 1 12 setting 3 11 System automatic 1 11 T TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 1 14 TOSHIBA Power Saver 1 12 TOSHIBA support 10 19 TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 1 13 Touch Pad 1 6 location 2 9 using 4 1 TV Tuner 1 8 4 23 TV 9 21 U Universal AC Adaptor additional 9 16 USB 1 7 location 2 3 2 6 problems 10 14 USB floppy disk drive 1 5 9 18 using 9 19 V Video modes B 1 Video RAM 1 4 Volume control 2 11 W Wireless communication 4 30 indicator 2 13 switch 1 10 2 2 4 32 Wireless communication switch indica tor 4 33 Wireless LAN 1 9 4 30 problems 10 16 Index 4 User s Manual Index X xD picture card 9 9 inserting 9 9 removing 9 9 User s Manual Index 5 Index
44. A Specifications Appendix B Display Controller and Modes Appendix C AT Commands Appendix D S registers Appendix E V 90 Appendix F Wireless LAN Appendix G TOSHIBA RAID Appendix H Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability Appendix I AC Power Cord and Connectors Appendix J Usage Restrictions Glossary Index User s Manual XXV Table of Contents Xxvi User s Manual Qosmio G30 Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the Qosmio G30 computer This powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion capability including multimedia devices and it is designed to provide years of reliable high performance computing This computer family includes a model with a built in TV tuner When you wish to display a TV program or play CD DVD with this model before Windows starts press the TV button or the CD DVD button or the same buttons on the remote control respectively during Windows startup When Windows is running you can display or record a TV program using the My TV feature of Media Center This manual tells how to set up and begin using your Qosmio G30 computer It also provides detailed information on configuring your computer basic operations and care using optional devices and troubleshooting If you are a new user of computers or if you re new to portable computing first read over the Introduction and The Grand Tour chapters to familiarize yourself with the computer s features components
45. AC adaptor and remove the battery to make sure the terminals are clean If necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth dipped in alcohol Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery Make sure it is securely seated Check the Battery indicator If it does not glow let the computer charge the battery for at least 20 minutes If the Battery indicator glows after 20 minutes let the battery continue to charge at least another 20 minutes before turning on the computer If the indicator still does not glow the battery may be at the end of its operating life Replace it If you do not think the battery is at the end of its operating life see your dealer If you frequently recharge a partially charged battery the battery might not charge to its full potential Fully discharge the battery then try to charge it again Check the power consumption settings in TOSHIBA Power Saver utility Consider using a power saving mode Procedure The RTC battery charge has expired Set the date and time in BIOS setup with the following steps 1 Press F1 key BIOS setup will boot up 2 Set the date in System Date 3 Set the time in System Time 4 Press End key Confirmation message will appear 5 Press Y key BIOS setup will terminate and the computer will be rebooted Procedure Refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility section in Chapter 6 Power User s Manual Troubleshooting Keyboard Keyboard problems can be ca
46. Front operation button and QosmioPlayer QosmioPlayer mode Icon AS E L Us m l Vo AO DOLBY Cp Nine buttons are available for use TV CD DVD Play Pause Stop Previous Next Record Brightness down Brightness up These buttons allow you to manage Audio Video functions run applications and access utilities 6 O 6 O va 6 DOLBY Figure 8 14 Front operation button Refer to the Front operation button in the Front operation button function section of this Chapter Function comparison list for TV DVD CD software QosmioPlayer mode Front operation QosmioPlayer TV QosmioPlayer CD DVD button TV Activate TV application Terminate CD DVD Start TV CD DVD Terminate TV Detect and activate media Start CD DVD Play Pause Play Pause Play Pause Stop Stop Stop Previous Previous Page Library Previous track chapter only Next Following Page Library Next track chapter only Rec Record Brightness Changes the brightness level of LCD 8 gt 7 gt 2 gt 1 Brightness Changes the brightness level of LCD 1 gt 2 gt 7 gt 8 DOLBY TV out User s Manual 8 17 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer My music My pictures Power Access indicator My TV My videos Stop Pause Record Play Fast Forward Rewind Skip More info Replay OK Start Volume Channel Page Volume Recorded TV DVD Menu Live TV
47. J not function with some applications User s Manual Introduction TOSHIBA Touch and Launch TOSHIBA TouchPad On Off Utility TOSHIBA RAID Utility TOSHIBA Password Utility CD DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer TOSHIBA Touch and Launch is a tool that allows you to perform various tasks easily using the Touch Pad TOSHIBA Touch and Launch is useful in the following conditions E To open a file located on the desktop whose icon is obscured by a window E To open a page contained in the Internet Explorer Favorites menu E To display the list of currently open windows and change the active window Also TOSHIBA Touch and Launch provides the following functions by customizing the settings E To open a file stored in a predefined folder E To quickly launch your frequently used applications which have been registered This utility has the following function To disable enable the Touch Pad with Fn F9 key TOSHIBA RAID Utility is used to create or manage RAID array To start the utility click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to RAID and click RAID Console This utility lets you set a password that restricts access to the computer This utility has the function to set up the read speed of CD It is ineffective in DVD User s Manual Introduction Options You can add a number of options to make your computer even more powerful and convenient to use You can buy the follow
48. LCD Overdrive reduces the afterimage that can occur in moving pictures This function is available only for NTSC This function is available InterVideo WinDVD User s Manual 8 35 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer 8 36 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 9 Optional Devices Optional devices can expand the computer s capabilities and its versatility This chapter describes connection or installation of the following devices which are available from your TOSHIBA dealer Cards memory E PC card E ExpressCard E Bridge media slot E SD card E Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro M xD picture card E MultiMediaCard E Memory expansion Power devices E Battery packs E Universal AC Adaptor E Battery Charger Peripheral devices Hard disk drive pack USB floppy disk drive External monitor TV HDMI S Video in i LINK IEEE1394 Bluetooth USB Adaptor Bluetooth Wireless Mouse Bluetooth Wireless Stereo Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit Other E Security lock User s Manual Optional Devices PC card The computer is equipped with a PC card slot that can accommodate one 5 mm Type Il card Any PC card that meets industry standards manufactured by TOSHIBA or other vendor can be installed The slot supports 16 bit PC cards including PC card 16 s multifunction card and CardBus PC cards CardBus supports the new standard of 32 bit PC cards The bus provides superior perf
49. P Select pulse dialing This command configures the modem for pulse non touch tone dialing Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received Tone dial is the default setting Qn Result code control Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and displayed on your monitor Basic result codes are OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER and ERROR The ATQ command allows the user to turn result codes on or off ao Enables modem to send result codes to the computer default Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise C 4 User s Manual AT Commands T Vn Xn Command XO x1 X2 X3 X4 default X5 Select tone dialing This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received This is the default setting DCE response format This command controls whether result codes including call progress and negotiation progress messages are displayed as words or their numeric equivalents vo Displays result codes as digits V1 Displays result codes as text default Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise Result code selection call progress monitoring This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem Dial tone Busy Supported Result Code detect signal detect Disable Disable OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Disabl
50. Pushto Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto Romance Kirundi Rundi Romanian User s Manual 8 27 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Code English Name of Language RU Russian RW Kinyarwanda Rwanda SA Sanskrit SD Sindhi SG Sangho SH Serbo Croatian Sl Sinhalese Singhalese SK Slovak SL Slovenian SM Samoan SN Shona Chishona SO Somali SQ Albanian SR Serbian SS Swazi Swati Siswati ST Sesotho Southern Sotho SU Sudanese SV Swedish SW Swahili Kiswahili TA Tamil TE Telugu Code TG TH TI TK TL TN TO TR TS TT TW UK UR UZ VI VO WO XH YO ZH ZU English Name of Language Tajiki Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Tshi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu 8 28 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Operational range of the remote control Point the remote control at your computer and press a button The operational angle and distance are described below Distance Within 5 m from the infrared receiver window Angle Within about 30 degrees horizontally and about 15 degrees vertically of perpendicular to the infrared receiver window Infrared receiver window 15degrees vertically 15degrees 4 vertically Remote Controlle
51. TF JIS C 6100 3 2i8Gmtlt ARTS Ema 3 208 REG PALER 140 DANE RAMZOAL TORR HIS MAB ARO MAREE IRL NILICHA LU CHREt BUBL Te WATT User s Manual v User s Manual Modem warning notice Conformity Statement The equipment has been approved to Commission Decision CTR21 for pan European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries regions the approval does not of itself give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance Network Compatibility Statement This product is designed to work with and is compatible with the following networks It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional requirements conditional in EG 201 121 Germany ATAAB ANO05 AN006 AN007 AN009 AN010 and DE03 04 05 08 09 12 14 17 Greece ATAAB ANO05 ANO006 and GR01 02 03 04 Portugal ATAAB ANO01 005 006 007 011 and P03 04 08 10 Spain ATAAB ANO05 007 012 and ES01 Switzerland ATAAB AN002 All other countries regions ATAAB AN003 004 Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details The hookflash timed break register recall function is subject to separate nation
52. Tour Left side Figure 2 2 shows the computer s left side Bridge media slot i LINK IEEE port eerie Microphone jack Headphone jack Qe SE ED V Universal Serial Bus PC card eject button USB 2 0 ports PC card slot Headphone S PDIF jack ExpressCard slot Figure 2 2 The left side of the computer Universal Two Universal Serial Bus ports are on the left o Serial Bus side The port comply with the USB 2 0 standard which enables data transfer speeds 40 times USB 2 0 ports faster than the USB 1 1 standard The ports also support USB 1 1 WN Keep foreign objects out of the USB connectors Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury F Operation of all functions of all USB devices has not been confirmed Some functions might not execute properly s lt lt p Bridge media slot This slot lets you insert an SD card Memory Stick Pro xD picture card and MultiMediaCard Refer to Chapter 9 Optional Devices WN Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting i
53. Zealand Pacific Islands Central America South America Caribbean Russia Indian Subcontinent Africa North Korea Mongolia China This section describes the types of writable CD DVD discs Check the specifications for your drive to for the type of discs it can write Use RecordNow to write compact discs Refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics 2 14 User s Manual The Grand Tour CDs E CD R discs can be written only once The recorded data cannot be erased or changed E CD RW discs including multi speed CD RW discs high speed CD RW discs and ultra speed CD RW discs can be recorded more than once E DVD R and DVD R discs can be written only once The recorded data cannot be erased or changed E DVD RW DVD RW and DVD RAM discs can be recorded more than once Formats The drives support the following formats i CD ROM DVD ROM HD DVD CD DA Photo CD single multi session CD ROM XA Mode 2 Form1 Form2 m DVD Video E CD Text mM CD ROM Mode 1 Mode 2 E Enhanced CD CD EXTRA E Addressing Method 2 Some types and formats of DVD R DL and DVD R DL discs may be unreadable DVD Super Multi drive Double Layer The full size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to rewritable CD DVDs as well as run either 12 cm 4 72 CD DVDs without using an adaptor J The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer edge DVD read DVD R write DVD R DL write DVD RW
54. also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem ExpressCard error occurs SD card Procedure Reseat the ExpressCard to make sure it is firmly connected Make sure the connection between the external device and the card is firm Check the card s documentation If problems persist contact your dealer Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem SD card error occurs You cannot write to an SD card You cannot read a file Procedure Reseat the SD card to make sure it is firmly connected Check the SD card s documentation Make sure the SD card is not write protected Make sure the target file is on the SD card inserted in the slot If problems persist contact your dealer Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro error occurs You cannot write to an Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro You cannot read a file Procedure Reseat the Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro to make sure it is firmly connected Check the card s documentation Make sure the Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro is not write protected Make sure the target file is on the Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro inserted in the slot If problems persist contact your dealer 10 10 User s Manual Troubleshooting xD picture card Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem Procedure xD picture card error Reseat the xD picture card to make
55. are marked with a blue XX in this manual Clicking on XX will display the related description CPU Central Processing Unit CPU Performance Legal Footnotes CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications under the following conditions E use of certain external peripheral products E use of battery power instead of AC power E use of certain multimedia computer generated graphics or video applications E use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections E use of complex modeling software such as high end computer aided design applications E use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously E use of computer in areas with low air pressure high altitude gt 1 000 meters or gt 3 280 feet above sea level HM use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5 C to 30 C 41 F to 86 F or gt 25 C 77 F at high altitude all temperature references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model please refer to your PC documentation or visit the Toshiba website at www pcsupport toshiba com for details User s Manual Legal Footnotes CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design configuration Under some conditions your computer product may automatically shut down This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost data or damage to the product when used outside recommended conditions To
56. be sent from one audio visual device to another It is also known as a SCART connector or Euro connector pixel A picture element The smallest dot that can be made on a display or printer Also called a pel plug and play A capability with Windows that enables the system to automatically recognize connections of external devices and make the necessary configurations in the computer port The electrical connection through which the computer sends and receives data to and from devices or other computers Power Saver Utility A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various power saving functions printed circuit board PCB A hardware component of a processor to which integrated circuits and other components are attached The board itself is typically flat and rectangular and constructed of fiberglass to form the attachment surface program A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to achieve a desired result See also application prompt A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or requires information or an action from you User s Manual Glossary 11 Glossary R Radio frequency interference RFI shield A metal shield enclosing the printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and TV interference All computer equipment generates radio frequency signals The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing device can allow past
57. com in the United States for more information m When you use Bluetooth Cards from TOSHIBA close to 2 4 GHz Wireless LAN devices Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or cause errors If you detect certain interference while you use Bluetooth Cards from TOSHIBA always change the frequency move your computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2 4 GHz Wireless LAN devices 40 meters 43 74 yards or more or stop transmitting from your computer Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on Web site http www toshiba europe com computers tnt bluetooth htm in Europe or http www pc support global toshiba com in the United States for more information E Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio frequency range and may interfere with one another If you use Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously you may occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or even lose your network connection If you should experience any such problem immediately turn off either one of your Bluetooth or Wireless LAN Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on web site http www toshiba europe com computers tnt bluetooth htm in Europe or http www pc support global toshiba com in the United States for more information H 2 User s Manual Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health The products with Bluetooth wireless
58. disk It is usually described in terms of kilobytes KB where one KB 1024 bytes and megabytes MB where one MB 1024 KB card Synonym for board See board CardBus An industry standard bus for 32 bit PC cards CD ROM A Compact Disc Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that can be read from but not written to The CD ROM drive uses a laser rather than magnetic heads to read data from the disc CD R A Compact Disc Recordable disc can be written once and read many times See also CD ROM CD RW A Compact Disc ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times See also CD ROM character Any letter number punctuation mark or symbol used by the computer Also synonymous with byte chassis The frame containing the computer chip A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for processing memory input output functions and controlling other chips CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor An electronic circuit fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly packaged and are highly reliable cold start Starting a computer that is currently off turning on the power COM1 COM2 COM3 and COM4 The names assigned to the serial and communication ports commands Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the actions of the computer or its peripheral devices communications The means by which a computer tran
59. fields Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt WiFi or Bluetooth operation E Turn WiFi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation possibly resulting in serious injury Follow the instruction of your medical device when using any WiFi or Bluetooth functionality E Always turn off WiFi or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near automatic contro equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment possibly resulting in serious injury 4 32 User s Manual Operating Basics Wireless communication indicator LAN A i The wireless communication indicator indicates the status of the wireless communication functions Indicator status Indication Indicator off Wireless communication switch is set to off Automatic power down because of overheating Power malfunction Indicator glows Wireless communication switch is on Wireless LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application If you used the Task Bar to disable the Wireless LAN you will need to restart the computer or follow the procedures below to enable the system to once again recognize and use wireless communications Open or click the following start Control Panel System Hardware Device Manager Network adapters Intel PRO Wirel
60. floppy disk drive after turning on the computer it will l take about 10 seconds for the computer to recognize the drive Do not disconnect and reconnect before 10 seconds has elapsed Disconnecting USB floppy disk drive When you have finished using the floppy disk drive follow the procedures below to disconnect it 1 Wait for the indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy disk activity has stopped N If you disconnect the floppy disk drive or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the floppy disk or the drive 2 Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 3 Click floppy disk drive device that you want remove 4 Pull the floppy disk drive s USB connector out of the computer s USB port External monitor An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port on the computer The computer supports WXGA and WUXGA video modes To connect a monitor follow the steps below 1 Turn the computer off 2 Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the screws on the left and right hand side External monitor port Monitor cable Figure 9 20 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port 2 The computer is equipped with either an HDMI or D Video out port J 9 20 User s Manual Optional Devices 3 Turn the monitor s power on 4 Turn the computer on When you turn on the powe
61. from a CD RW DVD RW DVD RW and DVD RAM disc cannot be recovered Check the content of the disc carefully before you delete it If multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected be careful not to delete data from the wrong drive E In writing to a DVD R RW DVD R RW or DVD RAM disc some disc space is required for file management so you may not be able to write the full capacity of the disc E Since the disc is based on the DVD standard it might be filled with dummy data if the written data is less than about 1 GB Even if you write only a small amount of data it might take time to fill in the dummy data E DVD RAM formatted by FAT32 cannot be read in Windows 2000 without DVD RAM Driver Software E When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected be careful not to write to the wrong drive E Be sure to connect the AC adaptor before you write or rewrite E Before you enter standby hibernation mode be sure to finish DVD RAM writing Writing is finished if you can eject DVD RAM media E Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing software E Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load on the CPU E Operate the computer in the full power mode Do not use power saving features E Do not write while virus check software is running Wait for it to finish and then disable virus detection programs including any software that checks files automatically in the backgr
62. full size drive provides high performance execution of CD DVD ROM based programs You can run 12 cm 4 72 CD DVDs An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD DVD ROM operation When the computer is accessing a CD DVD ROM an indicator on the drive glows E Use the WinDVD application to view DVD Video discs E An 8cm CD DVD can be used with the external Optical Disk Drive If you have a DVD super Multi drive refer also to the Writing CD DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive section for precautions on writing to CD DVDs Loading discs To load CD DVDs follow the steps below and refer to figures 4 5 1 Turn your computer on 2 Gently hold the CD DVD by the edges with its labeled facing up and insert it into the Optical Disk Drive slot straight on slowly Be sure to follow instructions below Gently push the CD DVD until it is loaded automatically Do not push it forcibly or at an angle to the Optical Disk Drive slot This may cause damage or adhesion of foreign matter on the surface of the CD DVD These imperfections may prevent the drive from reading from or writing to it Figure 4 4 Inserting a CD DVD 4 12 User s Manual Operating Basics Removing discs To remove the CD DVD follow the steps below and refer to figure 4 6 1 Check that your computer is on If not power your computer on 2 Press the Eject button shown by the arrow below a The CD DVD will be ejected about halfway Do not place your han
63. generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth Card from TOSHIBA or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user H 4 User s Manual Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability Caution Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the Bluetooth Card from TOSHIBA is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits Nevertheles
64. if one is connected Otherwise it selects the internal LCD Default LCD Analog RGB Selects both the internal LCD and external monitor for simultaneous display If the connected external monitor does not support the selected SVGA mode selecting the LCD Analog RGB mode will not display on that monitor If the computer was using multiple display devices when it was last shut down and those devices are still present when Windows starts again the computer will continue to use the devices after Windows starts If the devices are no longer present the computer will use the display specified in the BIOS Power On Display setting if no external display device is connected the computer will use the internal attached LCD display regardless of the BIOS Power On Display setting TV Type You can select the type of TV to receive the signal NTSC JAPAN For Japanese television sets Default value PAL S Video For European television sets 525p 480p D2 This can only be selected for models with D Video out port 1125i 1080i D3 This can only be selected for models with D Video out port 750p 720p D4 This can only be selected for models with D Video out port 525i 480 D1 This can only be selected for models with D Video out port NTSC US For US television sets When the D video output terminal is connected to the television select either D1 through D4 in accordance to the terminal on the televisio
65. information on the Legal Footnote regarding Memory Main System please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 2 User s Manual 1 3 Introduction Video RAM Power Battery pack There are two different types of graphics controllers The Video RAM specifications will differ depending on the type of graphics controller used in the computer E nVIDIA GeForce Go 7300 model 256MB of RAM is provided for video display Part of system memory is used for Video RAM When system memory of 1GB or more is installed there is a total of 512MB 256MB of Video RAM 256MB of system memory E nVIDIA GeForce Go 7600 model 128 256MB of RAM is provided for video display The computer is powered by one rechargeable lithium ion battery pack Legal Footnote Battery Life 3 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Battery Life please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 3 RTC battery AC adaptor Disks Hard disk drive The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time Clock and calendar The AC adaptor provides power to the system and recharges the batteries when they are low It comes with a detachable power cord It encloses 2 pin or 3 pin plug type Because it is universal it can receive a range of AC voltage from 100 to 240 volts however the output current varies among different models Using the wrong model can damage your computer Refer to the AC ad
66. is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as desktop computers printers and mobile phones You cannot use the built in Bluetooth functions and an optional Bluetooth SD card 3 simultaneously Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features Worldwide operation The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2 4 GHz band which is license free and compatible with radio systems in most countries in the world Radio links You can easily establish links between two or more devices The link is maintained even if the devices are not within line of sight Security Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security E Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible to falsify the origin of a message E Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following operating systems EH Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional E Microsoft Windows XP Detailed information regarding the use with these operating systems is listed below Please refer also to the electronic information which is included with each software This Bluetooth Stack is b
67. manual Alternate naming is included for reference Abbreviations AC alternating current AGP accelerated graphics port ANSI American National Standards Institute APM advanced power manager ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange BIOS basic input output system CD ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory CD RW Compact Disc ReWritable CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor CPU central processing unit CRT cathode ray tube DC direct current DDC display data channel DMA direct memory access DOS disk operating system DVD digital versatile disc DVD R Digital Versatile Disc Recordable DVD RAM Digital Versatile Disc Random Access Memory DVD R DL Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer DVD ROM Digital Versatile Disc Read Only Memory DVD RW Digital Versatile Disc ReWritable DVD R DL Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer ECP extended capabilities port FDD floppy disk drive FIR fast infrared HDD hard disk drive User s Manual Glossary 1 Glossary IDE integrated drive electronics IO input output IrDA nfrared Data Association IRQ interrupt request KB kilobyte LCD liquid crystal display LED light emitting diode LSI large scale integration MB megabyte OCR optical character recognition reader PCB printed circuit board PCI peripheral component interconnect RAM random access memory RGB red green and blue ROM read only memory RTC
68. mouse control utility 1 Click start click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and select Mouse icon 2 Click the Buttons tab 3 Set the double click speed as required and click OK The mouse pointer Try changing the speed setting in the mouse moves too fast or too control utility slow 1 Click start click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and select Mouse icon 2 Click the Pointer Options tab 3 Set the speed as required and click OK If problems persist contact your dealer The reaction of Touch Adjust the touch Sensitivity pad is either too Click start and open the Control Panel atid aah Click the Printers and Other Hardware icon Click the Mouse icon Click the Device Setting tab Click the Setting button The Properties for Synaptics Touch pad on PS 2 port screen appears Double click Sensitivity in the Select an item section on the left side of the screen 7 PalmCheck and Touch Sensitivity are displayed Click Touch Sensitivity 8 Move the slide bar for Touch Sensitivity to make an adjustment Click the OK button 9 Click the OK button on the Device Setting tab o ooe o a gt 10 12 User s Manual Troubleshooting USB mouse Problem On screen pointer does not respond to mouse operation Double clicking does not work The mouse pointer moves too fast or too slow The mouse pointer moves erratically Fingerprint Sensor Problem Reading
69. of your computer This is a sensor device that receives signals from the Remote Controller which is provided with your computer An internal modem provides capability for data and fax communication It supports V 90 V 92 Refer to V 90 section in Appendix E The speed of data transfer and fax depends on analog telephone line conditions It has a modem jack for connecting to a telephone line It is preinstalled as a standard device in some markets Both of V 90 and V 92 are supported only in USA Canada and Australia Only V 90 is available in other regions The computer has built in support for Ethernet LAN 10 megabits per second 10BASE T Fast Ethernet LAN 100 megabits per second 100BASE TX and Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000 megabits per second 1000BASE T It is preinstalled as a standard device in some markets User s Manual Introduction pmi o Bluetooth Some computers in this series are equipped with Bluetooth functions Bluetooth wireless technology eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices such as computers and printers Bluetooth provides fast reliable and secure wireless communication in a small space Wireless LAN Some computers in this series are equipped with a Wireless LAN mini PCI card that is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing radio technology that complies with the IEEE 802 11 Standard
70. of battery that can be used for the Remote Controller 8 31 Installing the batteries 2 0 2 ee ee 8 31 Replacing the batteries 0 00000 c eee eee 8 32 QosmioEngine e e a tietoa je i a a eee ee 8 32 Restrictions of the QosmioEngine 0 0c eee eee 8 33 nVIDIA GeForce Go 7300 22 eee 8 34 Optional Devices PC Card jis ccas creda venkat eee ded ek dis 9 2 Inserting a PC Card s ee rame ods chew DEEE EE EE EE 9 2 Removing a PC card 02 cece eee 9 3 ExpressCard eiicintncnecchacindettnne ace esametteaw AREE 9 3 Inserting an ExpressCard 0 0 cece eee eee 9 3 Removing an ExpressCard 0 0 0 cece eee eee 9 4 Bridge media Slot 20 0 cece eee eee eee eee ees 9 5 SD Caldies csse Sart pies cer O a bales wed ee ee nee eee eas 9 5 Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro 1 2 ee eee 9 7 XD PICture Card seher eae beaks Pap bere eee ones 9 9 MultiMediaCard 0 0 cette 9 10 Memory expansion 0 0c cece eee eee eee 9 12 Installing memory module 00 00 e eee ee 9 13 Removing memory module 0 20 e eee eee eee 9 15 Battery PackS 0 cece eee eee eee eee 9 16 Universal AC Adaptol occ eee tiaan sisanra eae deawne tant aan 9 16 Battery Charger is ccc ese cece ee eee eee eee 9 16 xxii User s Manual Table of Contents Hard disk drive pack 0 cece eee eee 9 16 Removing the Hard disk drive pack 20 ce eevee 9 16 Ins
71. or disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed Wait for the HDD indicator to go out Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the battery release latch and cause injuries 6 12 User s Manual Power To remove a discharged battery follow the steps below 1 Save your work Turn the computer s power off Make sure the Power indicator is off Remove all cables connected to the computer Close the LCD display panel and turn the computer upside down Slide the battery safety lock towards the release Gq position to make the battery release latch movable aol a Battery pack Figure 6 1 Releasing the battery pack 1 6 Slide the battery release latch to free the battery pack for removal then slide out the battery pack Battery release latch Battery pack Figure 6 2 Releasing the battery pack 2 To install a battery follow the steps below 7 Insert the battery pack User s Manual 6 13 Power Make sure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery safety lock is in the lock position g Battery safety lock Battery pack Figure 6 3 Securing the battery pack Turn your computer over TOSHIBA Password Utility The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security User and Supervisor i Passwords set in TOSHIBA Pas
72. or video decks by connecting your computer to this type of device Imported video can be edited or written to a DVD disk 1 Insert one end of the VIDEO IN cable into the VIDEO IN port of your computer VIDEO IN port Figure 8 13 Connecting the VIDEO IN port 2 Insert the other end of the VIDEO IN cable into the output port of the analog device you wish to connect To hear sounds use a video cable to connect the sound terminals of the audio device and your computer red sound right channel white sound left channel T When playing a DVD video with recorded data from the TV on Play DVD in I the Media Center pushing the Skip button on the Remote Controller while the last chapter is playing may result in the Media Center freezing If this occurs end ehshell exe from the process tab in task manager QosmioPlayer QosmioPlayer is a quick play feature that enables users to perform TV DVD and CD playback as well as AV input image and voice data without using Windows QosmioPlayer is provided with some models To use the QosmioPlayer feature some settings must be specified For more information on how to configure refer to the chapter on the QosmioPlayer Setting in the User s Manual Front operation button function This section describes the functions of the front operation button for QosmioPlayer mode 1 Please do not press the button too strenuously 8 16 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller
73. other metal accessories E When storing or disposing of used batteries make sure to put some insulation tape on their terminals and to avoid short circuits If these precautions are not followed heating fluid leakage or explosion may occur This may cause burns or personal injury If battery fluid gets on your skin or clothes wash immediately with clean water If battery fluid gets in your eyes rinse your eyes with clean water immediately and see a doctor Do not touch the battery fluid on instruments or devices with bare hands Wipe off with a cloth or paper towel 8 12 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Type of battery that can be used for the Remote Controller When the batteries shipped with the Remote Controller are discharged replace them with commercially available AA manganese batteries or AA alkaline batteries Other types or battery should not be used Installing the batteries 1 Open the battery cover on the back side of the Remote Controller Push the tab in the direction of the arrow to open the cover Battery cover Tab Figure 8 8 Opening the battery cover 2 Insert the batteries in place Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities and in the correct position Batteries Figure 8 9 Inserting the batteries 3 Close the battery cover Close the cover securely until it clicks Battery cover Figure 8
74. remote control is sending signals to the computer Please note that this indicator will not light after the battery has been completely discharged The My TV menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My music menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My pictures menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed The My videos menu screen is displayed When the Media Center is not activated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed Records the selected television program and stores it on your hand disk Stops the media currently playing Pauses an audio or video track and live or recorded TV programs Plays the selected media Moves the media video DVD music and so on backwards Moves the media video DVD music and so on forwards User s Manual 8 7 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Replay Skip Back More Info Arrows OK Volume Volume Start Channel Page up and down Mute Recorded TV Guide Live TV DVD Menu Moves media backward seven seconds for videos and live TV one music track or one DVD chapter at a time Moves media forward 30 seconds for videos and live TV one music track o
75. settings is off Aa Press Fn F12 ScrLock to lock the cursor on a specific line The power on default is off eA Press Fn Enter to simulate Enter on the enhanced keyboard s numeric keypad Press Fn Ctrl to simulate the enhanced keyboard s right Ctrl key Hot keys Hot keys Fn a function or Esc key let you enable or disable certain features of the computer The Hot key functions are supported only under Windows not supported under QosmioPlayer e Sound mute Pressing Fn Esc in a Windows environment turns sound on or off When you press these hot keys the current setting will change and be displayed as an icon User s Manual 5 3 The Keyboard ape Instant security Press Fn F1 to blank the screen to prevent others from accessing your data To restore the screen and original settings press any key or press the Touch Pad If a screensaver password is registered a dialog box will appear Enter the screensaver password and click OK If no password is set the screen will be restored when you press any key or press the Touch Pad ake Power save mode Pressing Fn F2 changes the power save mode If you press Fn F2 in a Windows environment the Power Save Mode is displayed in a dialog box similar displayed in a dialog box Continue holding down Fn and press F2 again to change the setting You can also change this setting through the profile item in TOSHIBA Power Saver y
76. specified on the regulatory label of the unit Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock possibly resulting in serious injury E Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of use Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock possibly resulting in serious injury E The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this region For use in other regions please buy power cords that conform to safety rules and regulations in the particular region E Do not use a 3 pin to 2 pin conversion plug E When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer always follow the steps in the exact order as described in the User s Manual Connecting the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical change and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched As a general safety precaution avoid touching any metal parts E Never place an AC adaptor on a wooden surface furniture or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat since the AC adaptor s surface temperature increases during normal use E Always place the PC on a suitable heat insulating material to prevent possible heat damage User s Manual 3 7 Getting Started 1 Connect the power cor
77. standard or analog TV antenna E TOSHIBA does not guarantee that signals received by satellite or cable TV receivers will work properly and does not provide technical support for them E The TOSHIBA Qosmio s AC power adaptor must be connected to get the best possible audio and video performance E For copyright protection reasons TOSHIBA has incorporated CGMS Copy Generation Management System restrictions into this product This allows a broadcasting channel to send a signal to prevent a motion picture from being copied E The Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition s radio features cannot be used because the TV feature does not include a radio receiver FM tuner E Itis not possible to record a TV program on one channel and simultaneously view a TV program on another channel because the computer only has one TV feature However it is possible to view one recorded TV program and simultaneously record another E The TV feature lets you capture and record a video stream S Video Composite Video from a camcorder DVD player etc Because of the large number of peripherals currently on the market TOSHIBA does not guarantee that this type of configuration will work properly and does not provide support for this functionality Teletext functionality is not supported User s Manual Usage Restrictions J 2 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Glossary The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this
78. technology with various memory capacities MultiMediaCards let you easily transfer data from devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants that use MultiMediaCard flash memory The cards have a high level of security and copy protection features Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury MultiMediaCards comply with SDMI Secure Digital Music Initiative which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of digital music For this reason you cannot copy or playback protected material on another computer or other device You may not use the reproduction of any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment Inserting a MultiMediaCard To insert a MultiMediaCard follow the steps below 1 Insert the MultiMediaCard into the Bridge media slot 9 10 User s Manual Optional Devices 2 Press gently to ensure a firm connection Bridge media slot Figure 9 9 Inserting a MultiMediaCard JN Make sure the MultiMediaCard is oriented properly before you insert it Removing a MultiMediaCard To remove a MultiMediaCard follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 Grasp the card and remove it Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar Point to MultiMedi
79. the Battery indicator should glow orange to indicate that the battery pack is being charged If the DC IN indicator does not glow power is not being supplied Check the connections for the AC adaptor and power cord 5 Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows blue If you have extra battery packs rotate their use If you will not be using the system for an extended period more than one month remove the battery pack Disconnect the AC adaptor when the battery is fully charged Overcharging makes the battery hot and shortens life If you are not going to use the computer for more than eight hours disconnect the AC adaptor Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight Replacing the battery pack The battery pack is classified as a consumable item The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through repeated charging and discharging It will need to be replaced when it reaches the end of its operating life You might also replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are operating your computer away from an AC power source This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack To remove a discharged battery pack follow the steps below Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby mode Data is stored in RAM so if the computer loses power it will be lost In Hibernation mode data will be lost if you remove the battery
80. the Remote Controller E When direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light strikes the infrared receiver window E When the infrared receiver window or the infrared emission part of the Remote Controller is dirty E When other computers which use an infrared remote controller are used near to your computer E When a low battery condition is present Installing Removing batteries gt O Be sure to install the dry batteries provided with this product before using the Remote Controller The procedures for installing and removing the batteries vary depending on the type of the Remote Controller Check the type and then install or remove the batteries as instructed Store the battery for the remote contro beyond the reach of children If a child swallows a battery this might result in choking If it happens contact a doctor immediately Observe the following precautions when using the battery of the Remote Controller E Do not use batteries other than those specified E Ensure that you insert the batteries with their polarities correctly aligned or E Do not recharge heat disassemble or short the battery or put it into a fire or flame E Do not use a battery whose recommended expiration date has been reached or which is completely discharged E Do not use different types of batteries or old and new batteries at the same time E Do not carry the battery together with metal necklaces hairpins or
81. the computer is hooked up to an AC adaptor and please use the AC power If this is used under battery power you are in danger of experiencing recording failures sound fades or frames being dropped from videos due to battery depletion For more information refer to the manual in the Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Front operation button function i This section describes the functions of the front operation button for Windows mode Please do not press the button too strenuously Windows mode Eleven buttons are available for use TV CD DVD Play Pause Stop Previous Next Record Brightness down Brightness up DOLBY TV out These buttons allow you to manage Audio Video functions run applications and access utilities 6 O 6 O DOLBY Figure 8 1 Front operation button TV button In Windows Media Center Edition starts Media Center and My TV is displayed CD DVD button Pressing this button will launch an application program that allows you to watch a DVD or listen to a CD Pressing this button while the computer is on or in standby mode will launch Media Center My Music is displayed when music CD is set and Play DVD starts when DVD video is set in CD DVD drive Play Pause button If pressing this button Media Center cannot be run in Windows Media Center Edition While running Media Center this butto
82. to those available from the Remote Controller in the QosmioPlayer mode Note that some functions via the Remote Controller in the list may not be supported by the Remote Controller you are using Check the model and specifications of your Remote Controller before use Computer Power button Ctrl Space Ctrl R Space Space lt orO gt orP QosmioPlayer TV Terminate QosmioPlayer TV Stop Record Pause Play Rewind quickly Forward quickly Previous Page Library only Following Page Library only QosmioPlayer CD Terminate QosmioPlayer CD Stop Pause Play Rewind by about 10 seconds Skip by about 10 seconds Previous track Next track QosmioPlayer DVD Terminate QosmioPlayer DVD Stop Pause Play Rewind quickly Forward quickly Previous chapter Next chapter 8 22 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer VOL Volume CH Channel CH Channel MUTE RECORD TV GUIDE Esc Enter Ctrl 4 Ctrl 4 PgUp PgDn F9 or TAB F1 Menu cancel or hides Change the channel display mode Move the cursor Move the cursor Move the cursor Move the cursor Execute the selected option Increase the volume Decrease the volume Next channel Previous channel Mute the volume Displays or hides the Library Display the guide Change the CD
83. transmitting in the high band answer mode This command is only used in V 22 and V 22bis mode This option is not used in North America and is for international use only amp GO Guard tone disabled default amp G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz amp G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 ERROR Otherwise Local flow control selection amp KO Disable flow control amp K3 Enable CTS RTS flow control default amp K4 Enable XON XOFF flow control Result Codes OK n 0 3 4 ERROR Otherwise Select Pulse Dial Make Break Ratio WW amp PO Selects 39 61 make break ratio at 10 pulses per second amp P1 Selects 33 67 make break ratio at 10 pulses per second amp P2 Selects 33 67 make break ratio at 20 pulses per second Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 ERROR Otherwise User s Manual C 7 AT Commands amp Tn Self test commands These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data loss or random errors amp TO Abort Stops any test in progress amp T1 Local analog loop This test verifies modem operation as well as the connection between the modem and computer Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated then demodulated and returned to the local DTE To work properly the modem must be off line Result Codes OK n 0 CONNECT n 1 ERROR Otherwise amp V Display Current Configuration This command displays the current configuration of the modem If nonvolati
84. turn on the power If the incompatible module is installed in slot A there will be a long beep 1 second followed by one short beep 0 5 seconds while if the incompatible module is in slot B there will be a long beep followed by two short beeps In the event both modules are incompatible there will be a long beep followed by one short beep a pause and then a long beep followed by two short beeps In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the incompatible module s F Use a 0 point Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws Use I of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads Installing memory module There are slots for two memory modules one over the other The procedures are the same for installing either module 1 Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer s power off Make sure the Power indicator is off Refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 3 Getting Started 2 Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer 3 Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6 Power for details 4 Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover The screw is attached to the cover to prevent it from being lost 5 Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off Memory module cover Screw Figure 9 11 Removing the memory module cover User s Manual 9 13
85. up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature Built in LAN This feature enables or disables the Built in LAN Enabled Enables Built in LAN functions Default Disabled Disables Built in LAN functions Device Config Device Configuration This option lets you set the device configuration All Devices BIOS sets all devices Setup by OS Operating system sets devices that it can control Default 7 6 User s Manual HW Setup PCI Express Link ASPM This feature lets you set the PCI Express power saving configuration Enabled Enables power saving when the PCI Express device is not being used Disabled Disables power saving for performance Auto Power saving is enabled when the computer is running from battery power and the PCI Express device is not being used Default USB USB KB Mouse Legacy Emulation Use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard mouse legacy emulation If your operating system does not support USB you can still use a USB mouse and keyboard by setting the USB KB Mouse Legacy Emulation item to Enabled Enabled Enables the USB KB Mouse Legacy Emulation function Default Disabled Disables the USB KB Mouse Legacy Emulation function USB FDD Legacy Emulation Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy disk drive legacy emulation If your operating system does not support USB you can still use a USB floppy di
86. write DVD R write DVD R DL write DVD RW write DVD RAM write CD read CD R write CD RW write 8 speed maximum 8 speed maximum 2 speed maximum 4 speed maximum 8 speed maximum 2 4 speed maximum 4 speed maximum 5 speed maximum 24 speed maximum 24 speed maximum 10 speed maximum Ultra speed media User s Manual 2 15 The Grand Tour AC adaptor i The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100 to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz enabling you to use this computer in almost any country region The adaptor converts AC power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer To recharge the battery simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source and the computer Refer to Chapter 6 Power for details Figure 2 11 The AC adaptor 3 pin plug E The Universal AC Adaptor and power cord bundled with this product may differ depending on the product model Depending on the model a 2 pin plug or 3 pin plug set of the above may be bundled E Do not use a 3 pin to 2 pin conversion plug E The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this region For use in other regions please buy power cords that conform to safety rules and regulations in the particular region Always use the Toshiba AC adaptor that was provided with your PC and the Toshiba Battery Char
87. 0 a ie 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 i 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SS SO f loo o 00 00 00 200 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a 4 Tal 99 00 00 00 od A lel I q 00 00 00 00 oo oo oo gt P N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Ye fd lero TO Cooling vents xxxii User s Manual General Precautions Cooling vents Cooling vents To prevent possible overheating of the CPU make sure the cooling fan s air intake is not blocked The fan draws in air by creating a vacuum If the fan is blocked it could cause the CPU to run at a lower performance level or cause the computer to shut down Loose items such as notebook and tissue paper plastic wrappers or other similar materials can block the air intake preventing air from reaching the CPU Do not use the computer on surfaces with objects that can be drawn in by the cooling fan User s Manual xxxiii General Precautions XXXiVv User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an equipment checklist and it identifies the computer s features options and accessories N Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if you use an operating system that was not preinstalled by TOSHIBA Equipment checklist Carefully unpa
88. 2 CD ROM XA Mode 2 Form1 Form2 Enhanced CD CD EXTRA Addressing Method 2 DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD RAM User s Manual 125 Introduction An 8cm CD DVD can be used with the external Optical Disk Drive Display The computer s LCD panel supports high resolution video graphics The screen can be set at a wide range of viewing angles for maximum comfort and readability Built in 17 TFT LCD screen 32 M colors with one of the following resolutions E WXGA 1440 horizontal x 900 vertical pixels E WUXGA 1920 horizontal x 1200 vertical pixels Legal Footnote LCD 5 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding LCD please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 5 Graphics controller Graphics controller maximizes display performance Refer to Display Controller and Modes section in Appendix B for more information Legal Footnote Graphics Processor Unit GPU 6 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Graphics Processor Unit GPU please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 6 Keyboard Built in 85 keys or 86 keys compatible with IBM enhanced keyboard embedded numeric overlay dedicated cursor control ay and keys Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard for details Pointing Device Built in Touch Pad A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest enable control of the on screen pointer and
89. 4 35 Moving the computer 00 0 cece eee eee eee 4 35 The Keyboard Typewriter KeyS 2 cece eee 5 1 Function keys F1 F12 0 0 00 cee cece eee eee eee 5 2 Soft keys Fn key combinations 000 2c e eee eens 5 2 Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard 55 5 2 HOUKCYSi ariin tens see aaameaa E A masse aaa as 5 3 Fn Sticky key so 2 00 tedu nie ene ne E hacen eee ee 5 6 Windows special keyS 00 0 c see eee eee eee eee 5 6 Keypad overlay 2 cece eee eee eee eee eee 5 7 Turning on the overlayS 0 cece ees 5 7 Temporarily using normal keyboard overlay on 5 8 Temporarily using overlay overlay off 02 ee ae 5 8 Temporarily changing modes 0 eee eee eee ees 5 8 Generating ASCII characters 0 0c ee eee eee eee 5 8 Power Power conditions 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 6 1 Power Indicators 2 22 jac eee ee ea eee ee ee ee 6 2 Battery indicator 0 eects 6 2 DC IN indicator 0 0 0 0 eect eee 6 3 Power indicator eoaid eaa Eataa iaa eee 6 3 XX User s Manual Table of Contents Battery typeS fice eee tiari eee ee ee eee 6 3 Battery pack icaiitaee ieee bh eh e aea ede ky 6 4 High Capacity Battery Pack Option 00 0 eee 6 5 Real Time Clock battery 0 0 0 cece eee 6 5 Care and use of the battery pack 0 0 cece eee eee 6 6 Safety precautions 0 0 0 eee 6 6 Chargi
90. 6 E The DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer Recording model employs a laser system To ensure proper use of this product please read this instruction manual carefully and retain for future reference Should the unit ever require maintenance contact an authorized service location E Use of controls adjustments or the performance of procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure E 7o prevent direct exposure to the laser beam do not try to open the enclosure Location of the required label SERIAL NO MANUFACTURED COMPLIES WITH FDARADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 Panasonic Shikoku Electronics Co Ltd 2131 1 Minamigata Toon shi Ehime Japna xiv User s Manual User s Manual International precautions CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT TO EN 60825 1 YOR VF RU CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT TOEN60825 ADVERSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED ABNING NAR SIKKERHEDSAF BRYDER ER UDE AF FUNKTION UNDGA UDSAETTSLSE FOR STRALING CAUTION This appliance contains a laser system and is Classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT To use this model properly read the instruction manual carefully and keep this manual for your future reference In case of any trouble with this model please contact your nearest AUTHORIZED service station To prevent direct exposur
91. Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility described in the Control Panel Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power Saver When you turn the power back on you can continue where you left when you shut down the computer When the computer is shut down in standby mode the power indicator flashes orange If you are operating the computer on battery power you can lengthen the operating time by shutting down in hibernation mode Standby mode consumes more power Standby limitations Standby will not function under the following conditions Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise 3 12 User s Manual Getting Started Hibernation Mode A pio mule The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard disk when the computer is turned off The next time the computer is turned on the previous state is restored The Hibernation Mode feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices E Save your data While entering Hibernation Mode the computer saves the contents of memory to the hard disk drive However for safety sake it is best to save your data manually E Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed Wait for the HDD indicator to go out E Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in Hibernation Mode Data wi
92. C CONNECT 9600 EC CONNECT 14400 EC CONNECT 19200 EC CONNECT 7200 EC CONNECT 12000 EC CONNECT 16800 EC CONNECT 300 EC CONNECT 21600 EC CONNECT 24000 EC CONNECT 26400 EC Numeric 0 1 2 oO N DO oOo A oO 12 13 14 24 25 86 40 55 56 57 Description Command executed Modem connected to line A ring signal has been detected Modem lost carrier signal or does not detect carrier signal or does not detect answer tone Invalid command Connection at 1200 bps No dial tone detected Busy signal detected No quiet answer Connection at 2400 bps Connection at 4800 bps Connection at 9600 bps Connection at 14400 bps Connection at 19200 bps Connection at 7200 bps Connection at 12000 bps Connection at 16800 bps Connection at 300 bps Connection at 21600 bps Connection at 24000 bps Connection at 26400 bps D 6 User s Manual S registers CONNECT 28800 EC CONNECT 31200 EC CONNECT 33600 EC DELAYED BLACKLISTED BLACKLIST FULL 58 59 60 88 89 90 Connection at 28800 bps Connection at 31200 bps Connection at 33600 bps Delay is in effect for the dialed number Dialed number is blacklisted Blacklist is full 1 EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled EC is replaced by one of the following symbols depending upon the error control method used V 42bis V 42 error control and V 42bis data co
93. Chapter 10 Troubleshooting for the detail The computer s RTC battery is a Ni MH battery and should be replaced only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative The battery can explode if not properly replaced used handled or disposed of Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations User s Manual 6 5 Power Care and use of the battery pack The battery pack is a vital component of portable computing Taking proper care of it will help ensure longer operating time on battery power as well as a longer life for your battery pack Follow the instructions in this section carefully to ensure safe operation and maximum performance Safety precautions Mishandling of battery packs can cause death serious injury or property damage Carefully observe the following advisories Warning Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow instructions Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in moderate or minor injury or property damage Note Provides important information Warning 1 Never attempt to dispose of a battery pack by burning or by throwing it into a fire and never allow exposure to a heating apparatus e g microwave oven Heat can cause a battery pack to explode and possibly cause serious injury 2 Never attempt to disassemble tamper with or repair a battery pack
94. China TOSHIBA Personal Computer amp Network Shanghai Co Ltd 43F Hong Kong New World Tower No 300 Huaihai Zhong Road Shanghai P R China 200021 Singapore TOSHIBA Singapore Pte Ltd 438B Alexandra Road 06 01 Alexandra Technopark Singapore 119968 United States of America TOSHIBA America Information Systems Inc 9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine California 92618 USA In Europe Germany amp Ausiria TOSHIBA Europe I E GmbH Gesch ftsbereich Deutschland sterreich Hammfelddamm 8 D 41460 Neuss Germany France TOSHIBA Syst ms France S A 7 Rue Amp re B P 131 92804 Puteaux Cedex Netherlands TOSHIBA Information Systems Benelux B V Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK Capelle a d IJssel Spain TOSHIBA Information Systems ESPANA Parque Empresarial San Fernando Edificio Europa le Planta Escalera A 28830 Madrid United Kingdom TOSHIBA Information Systems U K Ltd TOSHIBA Court Weybridge Business Park Addlestone Road Weybridge Surrey KT15 2UL The Rest of Europe TOSHIBA Europe I E GmbH Gesch ftsbereich Deutschland sterreich Hammfelddamm 8 D 41460 Neuss Germany User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 11 Legal Footnotes This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA computers In the text in this manual XX is used to show which Legal Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers Description s related to this computer
95. D Selects the primary HDD2 Selects the CD ROM 1 Floppy disk drive is looked for when the boot disk is contained in external floppy disk drive 2 In this computer CD ROM refers to the Fixed Optical Disk Drive 3 Only the model with two HDDs is supported To change the boot drive follow the steps below 1 Hold down F12 and boot the computer User s Manual 7 3 HW Setup pmi o 2 The following menu will be displayed with the following icons Built in HDD1 Built in HDD2 CD ROM floppy disk drive Network LAN boot A bar will appear only under the selected device 3 Use the left right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and press Enter E fonly a Supervisor Password has been set the following should be noted E The boot device menu will appear when the Able to run HW Setup option has been configured E The boot device menu will not appear when the Unable to run HW Setup option has been configured E fboth a Supervisor Password and a User Password are set the following should be noted E The boot device menu will appear when you use either the Supervisor Password or the User Password to start the computer and the Able to run HW Setup option has been configured E The boot device menu will not appear when you use the User Password to start the computer and the Unable to run HW Setup option has been configured E The boot device menu will appear when you use t
96. DMI or D Video out port S Video out port sp This S Video out port lets you transfer NTSC or PAL data to external devices Refer to 7V section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices User s Manual 2 7 The Grand Tour Underside Figure 2 5 shows the underside of the computer Make sure the display is closed before turning over your computer Memory module cover 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 90 Battery release latch Battery safety lock HDD1 Figure 2 5 The underside of the computer Memory module cover HDD1 HDD2 Battery safety lock This cover protects memory module sockets Refer to the Memory expansion section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices This contains a Hard disk drive pack which can be removed and reinstalled For more information on how to remove or reinstall the Hard disk drive pack refer to the section on the in Chapter 9 Optional Devices If your model has two Hard disk drives this contains a secondary Hard disk drive pack The secondary pack can be removed and reinstalled For more information on how to remove or reinstall the Hard disk drive pack refer to the section on the Hard disk drive pack in Chapter 9 Optional Devices Slide the battery safety lock towards the release position to make the battery release latch movable 2 8 User s Manual The Grand Tour Battery release Slide and hold this latch t
97. E Pointing device E Power E Fingerprint Sensor E Password E USB device E Keyboard E Memory expansion E Internal LCD display panel E Sound system E Hard disk drive E External monitor m DVD Super Multi drive E Modem E USB floppy disk drive E LAN E PC card E Wireless LAN E ExpressCard E Bluetooth E SD card E TV output signal E E E E E System start up When the computer does not start properly check the following items E Self Test E Power Sources E Power on Password User s Manual 10 3 Troubleshooting Self test When the computer starts up the self test will be run automatically and the following will be displayed Qosmio This message remains on the screen for a few seconds If the self test is successful the computer tries to load the operating system depending on how the Boot Priority is set in the TOSHIBA HW Setup program If any of the following conditions are present the self test failed E The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or messages except the Qosmio logo mM Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not function normally E The screen displays an error message Turn off the computer and check all cable connections If the test fails again contact your dealer Power A When the computer is not plugged into an AC outlet the battery pack is the primary power source However your computer has a number of other power resources i
98. Even if the above does not set up there are some as which the movies is simultaneously displayed depending on the type of the movies E This settings is not available on the some application like Media Center d Click OK e Click OK inthe Display Properties screen VIDEO IN Refer to chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer for details on how to connect and use the computer with the VIDEO IN cable S Video in This port allows you to import video data from analog video cameras or video decks by connecting your computer to this type of device Imported video can be edited or written to a DVD disk 1 Insert one end of the S Video in cable into the S Video in port of your computer S Video in port Figure 9 24 Connecting the S Video in port 2 Insert the other end of the S Video in cable into the output port of the analog device you wish to connect To hear sounds use a video cable to connect the sound terminals of the audio device and your computer red sound right channel white sound left channel User s Manual 9225 Optional Devices After connecting an analog video camera or a video deck to your computer run WinDVR WinDVR is started by selecting start gt All Programs gt InterVideo WinDVR Model without the TV Tuner The model without the TV Tuner only supports the Monitor Input feature This feature allows you to display video from a device s
99. GB or more over disk space every one hour of video When you make a fully recorded DVD the chapter sequence may not play correctly About Disc Manager WinDVD Creator can edit one play list on a disc WinDVD Creator might show a different thumbnail than you previously set in CE Consumer Electronics DVD RAM recorder Using the Disc Manager you can edit DVD VR format on DVD RAM DVD VR format on DVD RW and DVD Video format on DVD RW About recorded DVDs Some DVD ROM drives for personal computers or other DVD players may not be able to read DVD R R RW RW RAM discs When playing your recorded disc on your computer please use the WinDVD software application If you use an over used rewritable disc the full formatting might be locked Please use a brand new disc User s Manual 4 21 Operating Basics Media care This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD DVDs and floppy disks Handle your media with care The following simple precautions will increase the lifetime of your media and protect the data stored on them CD DVDs 1 Store your CD DVDs in the container they came in to protect them and keep them clean 2 Do not bend the CD DVD 3 Do not write on apply a sticker to or otherwise mar the surface of the CD DVD that contains data 4 Hold the CD DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole Fingerprints on the surface can prevent the drive from properly reading
100. If authentication is successful the user will be logged on to Windows If the fingerprint authentication fails please logon using the Windows logon password Please logon using the Windows logon password if the fingerprint authentication failed for three consecutive tries To logon using the Windows logon password enter the Windows logon password at the Welcome screen as normal A warning message will be displayed when authentication is abnormal or authentication is not successful within a fixed duration Fingerprint Power on Security General The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard based User BIOS Password authentication system when booting up If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password authentication when booting up but prefer to use the keyboard based system instead press the BkSP backspace key when the Fingerprint Power on Security screen is displayed This will switch the password input screen to the keyboard based one User s Manual 4 9 Operating Basics E tis necessary to register the User Password before using the Fingerprint Power on Security and its extended function the Fingerprint Single Sign On Feature Please use TOSHIBA Password Utility to register the User Password E f you fail fingerprint authentication more than five times you must enter the User Password or Supervisor Password manually to start the computer E When s
101. M 16M 16M 16M 85 1920 x 1440 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 Virtual 2 75 85 2048 x 1536 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 Virtual 75 1 The 1920 x 1200 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT WN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes User s Manual B 9 Display Controller and Modes PowerMizer T The PowerMizer function is only available in nVIDIA models PowerMizer is a graphics processor installed on this computer The performance of PowerMizer can be configured in three ways To define the performance select the menu options shown below Display Property gt Settings gt Advanced gt GeForce Go 7300 tab or GeForce Go 7600 tab gt GeForce Go 7300 tab or GeForce Go 7600 tab gt nView Display Settings gt PowerMizer The graphics processor offers three options Maximum Power Savings Balanced and Maximum Performance in each of the AC power mode and battery power mode lt I NVIDIA GeForce Go 7600 riview Display Settings arsine GeForce Go 7600 BNIDIA Performance amp Quality S Use these sliders to adjust your PowerMizer settings Color Correction Video Overlay Settings Current power source Current power level Tools AC outlet Maximum performance PowerMizer NVRotate AC outlet Screen Resolutions amp Fi J Desktop Mana
102. M drive uses a laser to read data from the disc DVD R DL A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD R storage capacity about 1 8 times larger than before The DVD RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc DVD ROM A Digital Versatile Disc Read Only Memory is a high capacity high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other high density files The DVD ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc DVD RW RW RW A Digital Versatile Disc ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times Glossary 6 User s Manual Glossary DVD R DL A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD R storage capacity about 1 8 times larger than before The DVD RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc z echo To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending device You can display the information on the screen or output it to the printer or both When a computer receives back data it transmitted to a CRT or other peripheral device and then retransmits the data to printer the printer is said to echo the CRT erase See delete escape 1 A code ASCII code 27 signaling the computer that what follows are commands used with peripheral devices such as printers and modems 2 A means of aborting the task currently in progress escape guard time A time before and after an escape code is sent to the modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the transmitted data an
103. MNP mode If this fails it connects in buffer mode and continues operation This is also known as V 42 MNP auto reliable mode same as amp Q5 N4__V 42 or disconnect The modem attempts to connect in V 42 error control mode If this fails the modem disconnects N5 V 42 MNP or buffered same as N3 N7 V 42 MNP or buffered same as N3 Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 ERROR Otherwise Qn Local flow control selection Q0 Disable flow control Q1 XON XOFF software flow control Q3 CTS RTS to DTE default Result Codes OK n 0 1 3 ERROR Otherwise Vn Protocol result code VO Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed V1 Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed default Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise B View numbers in blacklist If blacklisting is in effect this command displays the numbers for which the last call attempted in the past two hours failed The ERROR result code appears in regions that do not require blacklisting Cn Data compression control This command determines the operation of V 42bis and MNP class 5 data compression On line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs first C0 V 42bis MNP 5 disabled No data compression C3 V 42bis MNP 5 enabled Data compression enabled default Result Codes OK n 0 3 ERROR Otherwise User s Manual C 9 AT Commands C 10 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix D S regi
104. Qosmio G30 TOSHIBA Qosmio G30 Portable Personal Computer User s Manual User s Manual Copyright 2006 by TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of TOSHIBA No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein TOSHIBA Qosmio G30 Portable Personal Computer User s Manual First edition January 2006 Copyright authority for music movies computer programs data bases and other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author or to the copyright owner Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for personal use or use within the home Any other use beyond that stipulated above including conversion to digital format alteration transfer of copied material and distribution on a network without the permission of the copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author s rights and is subject to civil damages or criminal action Please comply with copyright laws in making any reproduction from this manual Ownership and copyright of music video computer programs databases etc are protected by the copyright laws These copyrighted materials may be copied for private use at home only If beyond the limitation above you copy including to transform data formats or modify these materials transfer them or distribute them via the Internet without appr
105. Touch Pad setting The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar or from the Control Panel The second is a tray menu entry that takes the user directly to the Synaptics Touch Pad Properties Dual Mode configuration in the control panel Dual Mode settings Function settings The Dual Mode configuration will be added to the Tapping Section in the standard control panel ty Properties for Synaptics LuxPad 6 2 Oust Mode vervas Tapping Tao and usg Teofan V Sych to Button Mode by tagong D P be goe ngi cora Enel orbsf ire Always in Dutton Mode when an Part gatna dence s paad n 4 Acoicahon 1 FS Aspicanon 2 Fl Aspe aon 3 Dual Mode A The Dusi Hode ieahee aike pou to seatch from Curse Mode to Butter Mode In Button Mode the vsa butong on the Touch ad sutace pe arveret hotats to hequertl used eppicatons and there is a vaime contolee for quch and etsy acoes lo naang or decomanny To enadis Dus Mode select the Switch to Ratton Mode bp lappang m ihe wpperight coenni checkbox To wia Button Moda Reas OK Cancel Figure 4 3 Dual Mode settings window Switch to Button Mode by tapping in the upper right corner Check the box to use Dual Mode If the box is left unchecked the mode cannot be switched by clicking the upper right corner of the Dual Mode Pad Always in Button Mode when an external device is plugged in The Dual Mode Pad will automatically switch to Button Mode when an extern
106. URES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER S MANUAL MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE VORSICHT DIE VERWENDUNG VON ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS DURCHFUHREN VON ANDEREN VORGANGEN ALS IN DER BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BESCHRIEBEN KONNEN GEFAHRLICHE STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR FOLGE HABEN xvi User s Manual Qosmio G30 Table of Contents Preface Manual contents ccc eee eee eee xxvii COnventiOns serris cnc eece de dene eee EEEE E ES xxviii Abbreviations 00 000 cee eee xxviii leons ee cane hg Sate aetna Seeks Oe a e anne xxviii KEYS eai aiaa eee et eb he bib a e xxviii Key Operatlony i246 v ensc dase tipene sanai CREEK E NDE DE i xX X Display seeren Bees E A A bed Ge be e ee AS xX X Messages ic san cand d raieunpe de eed ia EEE Saeed XXix General Precautions Stress AMUN caches eG annsa eeina a eaa xxxi Heat injury 0 0 cece eee eee XXxi Pressure or impact damage 0c eee eee eee eee eee XXXi PC card overheating 000 c eee c eee eee eee eee xxxii Mobile phone 2 0 00 ce eee eee eee eee xxxii The cautions on use of a Qosmio G30 series computer xxxii Introduction Equipment checklist sssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 1 1 FAOWANG iil si ne bee c te a kde ee A ede ee ek 1 1 Software see gaia aa cee E a Eaa Ea oa E Eaa AIEE versie Picea edness v8 1 2 Documentation o se teici e eee 1 2 Features sc isc ected eae tee eee eee ee ee eee 1
107. a frames might be dropped E Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer before you H Connect disconnect an i LINK device to from the computer HM Connect disconnect an i LINK device to from another i LINK device that is connected to the computer 9 26 User s Manual Optional Devices Connecting 1 Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i LINK IEEE1394 cable into the computer i LINK IEEE1394 port i LINK IEEE1394 connector Figure 9 25 Connecting the i LINK IEEE1394 port 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the device Note the following when you use i LINK E You may need to install drivers for your i LINK devices E Notalli LINK devices have been tested Therefore compatibility with all i LINK devices cannot be guaranteed Some devices might not support standby or automatic off functions Do not connect or disconnect an i LINK device while it is using an application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to save power Data might be destroyed Disconnecting 1 Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 2 Point to i LINK IEEE1394 device and click 3 Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i LINK device 1 Refer also to the documentation that came with your i LINK device Bluetooth USB Adaptor A Bluetooth adaptor that has a USB connector Wireless communications can be carried out with Bluetooth compatible equ
108. aCard and click Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly Bridge media slot Figure 9 10 Removing a MultiMediaCard Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove the MultiMediaCard or turn off the computer s power If you remove the MultiMediaCard or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the MultiMediaCard you may lose data or damage the card Do not remove a MultiMediaCard while the computer is in Standby or Hibernation mode The computer could become unstable or data in the MultiMediaCard could be lost User s Manual 9 11 Optional Devices MultiMediaCard care JN Set the write protect switch to the lock position if you do not want to record data H Do not write to a MultiMediaCard if the battery power is low Low power could affect writing accuracy E Do not remove a MultiMediaCard while read write is in progress E The MultiMediaCard is designed so that it can be inserted only one way Do not try to force the card into the slot E Do not leave a MultiMediaCard partially inserted in the slot Press the MultiMediaCard until you hear it click into place E Do not twist or bend MultiMediaCards H Do not expose MultiMediaCards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid E After using a MultiMediaCard return it to its case E Do not touch the metal part or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty Memory expansion You ca
109. ad the Product Recovery Media in the optional Optical Disk Drive and turn off the computer s power 2 Hold down the F12 key and turn on the power When Qosmio appears release the F12 key 3 Use the left or right cursor key to select the Optical Disk Drive in the Boot Devices menu For details refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7 HW Setup 4 Follow the on screen instructions User s Manual 3 15 Getting Started 3 16 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 4 Operating Basics This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer and precautions when using it as well as the handling of CD DVD Using the Touch Pad This computer has equipped one of the following Touch Pads E The Touch Pad of only a touch pad function E The Dual Mode Pad equipped with the touch pad and the dual mode function In Pointer Mode the Dual Mode Pad can be used to move the on screen pointer by touching the pad with a fingertip and moving the finger along the pad and in Dual Mode the Touch Pad can be used to operate a variety of functions Touch Pad Touch Pad control buttons Figure 4 1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons Pointing Mode Operation To use the Touch Pad in Pointing Mode simply touch it with a fingertip and move the finger along the pad in the direction you want the on screen pointer to move The two buttons below the keyboard are used like the buttons on a mouse Press the l
110. adio regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment F Refer to the sheet Information to the User for regulatory information that I may apply in your country region R F Frequency E Band 5GHz 5150 5850 MHz Revision A E Band 2 4GHz 2400 2483 5 MHz Revision B G Modulation mM DSSS CCK DSSS DQPSK DSSS DBPSK Technique Revision B E OFDM BPSK OFDM QPSK OFDM 16QAM OFDM 64QAM Revision A G The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the wireless communication Communications at lower transmit range may travel larger distances E The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high density materials E Range is also impacted due to obstacles in the signal path of the radio that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal Supported Frequency Sub bands Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries regions your Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz 2 4 GHz channels Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or your dealer for information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries regions Wireless IEEE 802 11 Channels Sets Revision B and G Frequency Range 2400 2483 5 MHz Channel ID 1 2412 2 2417 3 2422 4 2427 5 2432 F 2 User s Manual Wireless LAN 6 2437 7 2442 8 2447 9 2452 10 2457 11 2462 12 2467 13
111. air measures to be carried out in case of hard disk drive failures For RAID 1 with data redundancy if a hard disk drive failure occurs the hard disk drive is replaced and its data reconstructed from the other hard disk drive which did not fail If there are bad blocks etc in the hard disk drive that did not fail it is possible that portion of data might not be recovered and system down might occur An effective way to ensure that such situations do not happen is to carry out RAID 1 media checks regularly The TOSHIBA RAID utility is set as default to carry out media checks every month on the third Wednesday from noon User s Manual G 3 TOSHIBA RAID Starting Modifying and Ending the BIOS Setup Program Starting the BIOS Setup Program 1 Switch on your computer while pressing the Esc key If Password is displayed enter the User Password and press the Enter key Please refer to Chapter 6 the TOSHIBA Password Utility for details about the User Password The Check system Then press F1 key message is displayed 2 Press the F1 key The BIOS setup program will start up Modifying the BIOS 1 Select the RAID ARRAY setting in the SYSTEM SETUP 3 3 screen 1 Please refer to the operating instructions displayed in the settings screen 2 The settings are explained as follows Modify the settings as necessary Current State Shows the current hard disk status Create State Modify the hard disk configuration Modi
112. ake Movie button in the top bar Double Click the Right arrow button icon in the center of right side Put a blank DVD R R disc or an erased DVD RW RW disc in the drive Click Start to record to the disc When recording is finished the tray opens How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator Please refer to the on line Help for additional InterVideo WinDVD Creator information Important information for use Note the following limitations when you write video DVD 1E Editing digital video E Log in with Administrator rights to use WinDVD Creator E Make sure that your computer is running on AC power when using WinDVD Creator E Operate the computer at Full Power Do not use power saving features E While you are editing a DVD you can display previews However if another application is running the preview might not display properly E WinDVD Creator cannot show video on the external monitor when in simultaneous mode H WinDVD Creator cannot edit or play copy protected content H Do not change display settings while using WinDVD Creator E Do not enter standby hibernation mode while using WinDVD Creator E Do not operate WinDVD Creator immediately after turning on the computer Please wait until all disk disc drive activity has stopped HM When recording to a DV Camcorder to ensure you capture all of your data let the camcorder record for a few seconds before you begin recording your actual data E CD reco
113. al Operating Basics Cleaning the computer A To help ensure long trouble free operation keep the computer free of dust and use care with liquids around the computer E Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer If the computer does get wet turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely before you turn it on again E Clean the computer using a slightly damp with water cloth You can use glass cleaner on the display Spray a small amount of cleaner on a soft clean cloth and wipe the screen gently with the cloth Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any part of it Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the computer Moving the computer The computer is designed for rugged durability However a few simple precautions taken when moving the computer will help ensure trouble free operation E Make sure all disk activity has ended before moving the computer Check the HDD indicator on the computer E Ifa CD DVD is in the drives remove it Also make sure the disc tray is securely closed E Turn off the power to the computer E Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the computer E Close the LCD display panel Do not pick up the computer by its display panel E Before carrying your computer shut down the computer disconnect the power cable and wait until the PC cools down Failure to follow this instruction could result in mi
114. al USB mouse is connected Check the box to use the Dual Mode Pad in Button Mode when an external USB mouse is connected 4 4 User s Manual Operating Basics If Always in Button Mode when an external device is plugged in is checked and the remote control receiver is connected the Dual Mode Pad will switch to Button Mode Uncheck this box when using the remote control receiver The options for each function zone assigned to the action keys can be configured individually The actions available from the action list box are Browse backward one web page Browse forward one web page Go to a web page in your default browser Run a program of your choosing Previous Track Next Track Play Pause the media player Stop the media player Using the Fingerprint Sensor J This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints By enrolling the ID and password to the fingerprint authentication device it is no longer necessary to input the password from the keyboard Just by swiping the finger against the fingerprint sensor the following functions will be enabled E Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through IE Internet Explorer E Files and folders can be encrypted decrypted and third party access to them prevented E Disable the password protected screen saver when returning from power saving standby mode E Power on Security and Single S
115. al media with standard methods such as copying files If Windows XP s file encryption function EFS Encryption File System is used to encrypt a file the file cannot be further encrypted using the encryption function of this software In the help file it is stated that this software s Password Bank function can be used for the Internet and general applications However the Internet Password Bank function in the fingerprint utility provided in this computer can only be used with IE Internet Explorer Set Up Procedure Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint authentication Fingerprint Registration Enroll the required authentication data using the User Enrollment Wizard E The fingerprint authentication uses the same Windows logon ID and password If the Windows logon password has not been setup please do so before registration E Upto 21 fingerprint patterns can be registered on this sensor 1 Click start point to All Programs point to Protector Suite QL and click User Enrollment Wizard You can also start User Enrollment Wizard using the following method E Click the Protector Suite QL icon in the Task Bar E Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor 2 Click Next 3 The User s Password screen is displayed Ensure the same Windows logon username is displayed before entering a password into the Enter your password field Click Next 4 The Hints for Fingerprint Enrollment screen is
116. al time clock 1 4 6 5 safety precautions 6 6 save mode 1 11 types 6 3 Battery Charger 1 16 9 16 Battery pack 1 4 2 9 additional 9 16 replacing 6 12 Bluetooth 1 9 4 31 Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba 1 14 problems 10 17 Bridge media slot 1 7 2 3 9 5 Cache memory 1 3 Cleaning the computer 4 35 Cooling vents 2 6 User s Manual D DC IN indicator 2 12 6 3 Display 1 6 2 9 automatic power off 1 10 brightness decrease 5 5 brightness increase 5 5 controller B 1 hinges 2 10 opening 3 9 DLA for TOSHIBA 1 14 4 19 Documentation list 1 2 DVD Super Multi drive 1 5 problems 10 8 using 4 12 writing 4 14 E Environment 3 1 Equipment checklist 1 1 Equipment setup general conditions 3 2 placement 3 3 Ergonomics lighting 3 5 seating and posture 3 4 work habits 3 5 ExpressCard 1 7 9 3 inserting 9 3 problems 10 10 removing 9 4 External monitor 1 6 2 7 9 20 Index F Fingerprint Sensor problems 10 13 using 4 5 Fn Ctrl enhanced keyboard s simu lation 5 3 Fn Enter 5 3 Fn Esc Sound mute 5 3 Fn F1 instant security 5 4 Fn F10 Arrow mode 5 3 Fn F11 Numeric mode 5 3 Fn F12 ScrLock 5 3 Fn F2 power save mode 5 4 Fn F3 standby 5 4 Fn F4 hibernation 5 4 Fn F5 display selection 5 4 Fn F6 Internal LCD screen Bright ness decreases 5 5 Fn F7 Internal LCD screen Bright ness increases 5 5 Fn F8 wireless setting 5 5 Fn F9 Touch Pad 5 5 Fn s
117. al type approvals It has not been tested for conformity to national type regulations and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific function on specific national networks can be given vi User s Manual User s Manual J apan regulations Region selection If you are using the computer in Japan technical regulations described in the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan region mode It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other selection Redial Up to two redial attempts can be made If more than two redial attempts are made the modem will return Black Listed If you are experiencing problems with the Black Listed code set the interval between redials at one minute or longer Japan s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on analogue telephones but the redials must be made within a total of three minutes The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for Telecommunications Equipment Qeens A04 0609001 T One of the labels is located on the module 1C 4005B ATHENS REN 0 1 ETISALAT PERMIT NO EOGOUEING STEL 02355 POSTEL 2004 B93M1016 F Askey Computer Corp Made in China TECIWRIVMOD 08 02 099 JAN 05 G Q siete mdd gute ort tieeses
118. and accessory devices Then read Getting Started for step by step instructions on setting up your computer If you are an experienced computer user please continue reading the preface to learn how this manual is organized then become acquainted with this manual by browsing through its pages Be sure to look over the Special features section of the Introduction to learn about features that are uncommon or unique to the computers and carefully read HW Setup If you are going to install PC cards or connect external devices such as a monitor be sure to read Chapter 9 Optional Devices Manual contents This manual is composed of the following eleven chapters eight appendixes a glossary and an index Chapter 1 ntroduction is an overview of the computer s features capabilities and options Chapter 2 The Grand Tour identifies the components of the computer and briefly explains how they function User s Manual Preface Chapter 3 Getting Started provides a quick overview of how to begin operating your computer and gives tips on safety and designing your work area Chapter 4 Operating Basics This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer and precautions when using it as well as the handling of CD DVD Chapter 5 The Keyboard describes special keyboard functions including the keypad overlay and hot keys Chapter 6 Power gives details on the computer s power resources and battery save modes C
119. and be careful not to drop a heavy object onto the PC It could damage the PC or cause system failure Never use benzene thinner or other chemicals when cleaning the PC AC adaptor or storage device The use of benzene thinner or other chemicals may result in deterioration deformation or discoloration of those items and the loss of data Make sure the AC power cord connects to an outlet that is close to the computer and easily accessible The temperature should be 5 to 35 degrees Centigrade 41 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit and the relative humidity should be 20 to 80 percent Keep the computer free of dust moisture and exposure to direct sunlight Some parts of the computer including data storage media can be damaged by magnets Do not place the computer near magnetic objects or bring magnetic objects close to the computer Be careful of objects such as stereo speakers that produce strong magnetic fields during operation Also be careful with metal objects such as bracelets which can be inadvertently magnetized Do not operate the computer in close proximity to a mobile phone 3 2 User s Manual Getting Started Leave ample ventilation room for the fan Do not block the vents If the PC interferes with radio equipment turn the PC power off immediately Such interference could cause equipment malfunction Never place your PC on a shaky table uneven tilted surface or other unstable location Your PC may fall
120. and read write to the hard disk drive E Using an OS such as Linux to run applications that read write to the hard disk drive G 2 User s Manual TOSHIBA RAID E Boot menu When 2 hard disk drives are connected it is possible to select which hard disk drive to boot from in the boot menu However if a RAID configuration is used the 2 hard disk drives are recognized as 1 drive and there is no change in the boot configuration no matter which hard disk drive is selected E When using a RAID 1 mirroring configuration the additional hard disk drive s capacity must be equal to or more than the capacity of the existing hard disk drive E The hard disk drives used in the RAID configuration should not be removed and used in other computers E When using the RAID 1 mirroring configuration the OS recognizes the lesser capacity of the 2 hard disk drives For example if a 60 GB and an 80 GB hard disk drive are used in the mirroring configuration the OS will recognize the capacity as a 60 GB hard disk drive The additional 20 GB capacity over the 60 GB hard disk drive of the 80 GB hard disk drive cannot be used E fa hard disk drive had been replaced execute the rebuild command and rebuild the RAID 1 mirroring configuration E mplementing the media checking schedule Media checks should be carried out regularly to ensure even more stable operation of the RAID configuration and to make it easier for maintenance and rep
121. aptor section in Chapter 2 The Grand Tour Available in five sizes 40 0 billion bytes 37 26 GB 60 0 billion bytes 55 88 GB 80 0 billion bytes 74 52 GB 100 0 billion bytes 93 16 GB H 120 0 billion bytes 111 79 GB Two types of models are available one with one hard disk drive and the other with two hard disk drives 1 4 User s Manual Introduction Legal Footnote HDD Drive Capacity 4 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding HDD Drive Capacity please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 4 USB floppy disk Accommodates either 3 1 2 1 44 megabyte or drive 720 kilobyte floppy disks It connects to a USB port Option or provided with some models Optical Disk Drive Computers in this series can be configured with an Optical Disk Drive DVD Super Multi This computer is equipped with a full size DVD drive Double Layer Super Multi drive module that lets you record data to rewritable CD DVDs as well as run 12cm 4 72 CD DVDs It reads DVD ROMs at maximum 8 speed and CD ROMs at maximum 24 speed It writes CD R at up to 24 speed CD RW at up to 10 speed DVD R and DVD R at maximum 8 speed DVD R DL at maximum 2 speed DVD R DL at maximum 2 4 speed DVD RW and DVD RW at maximum 4 speed DVD RAM at maximum 5 speed The drive supports the following formats CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD Video CD DA CD Text Photo CD single multi session CD ROM Mode 1 Mode
122. arantee that the Fingerprint utility will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software or utility How to Swipe the Finger pio Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or authentication will help to minimize authentication failures 1 Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor Lightly touch the sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you While lightly touching the sensor swipe the finger towards you until the sensor surface becomes visible Ensure the center of the fingerprint is on the sensor when swiping the finger E Avoid swiping with the finger stiff or pressed on too hard Fingerprint reading may fail if the center of the fingerprint is not touching on the sensor or when finger is swiped while pressing hard Make sure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the sensor before swiping E Confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl before swiping Always confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl so that it is swiped along the center line of the sensor E When fingerprint reading is not successful There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too quickly or too slowly Follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the speed of the swipe User s Manual 4 11 Operating Basics Using Optical Disk Drives The
123. ased on Bluetooth Version 1 1 1 2 2 0 EDR specification TOSHIBA cannot confirm compatibility between any PC products and or other electronic devices that use Bluetooth other than TOSHIBA mobile PCs User s Manual 4 31 Operating Basics Release Notes related to the Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA 1 Install On Windows2000 or Windows XP Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA does not have a digital signature 2 Fax application software Regarding FAX application software there are some software that you cannot use on this Bluetooth Stack 3 Multi User On Windows XP the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi user environment This means that when you use Bluetooth other users logged onto the same computer will not be able to use its Bluetooth functionality Product Support The latest information regarding Operating System support Language Support or available upgrades can be found on our web site hitp www toshiba europe com computers tnt bluetooth htm in Europe or www pcsupport toshiba com in the United States Wireless communication switch You can enable or disable Wireless LAN function with the on off switch No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off Slide the switch to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off E Donot use the WiFi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic
124. ated start it up and the menu screen will be displayed Records the selected television program and stores it on your hand disk Stops the media currently playing Pauses an audio or video track and live or recorded TV programs Plays the selected media Moves the media video DVD music and so on backwards Moves the media video DVD music and so on forwards User s Manual 8 19 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Replay Skip Back More Info Arrows OK Volume Volume Start Channel Page up and down Mute Recorded TV Guide Live TV DVD Menu Moves media backward seven seconds for videos and live TV one music track or one DVD chapter at a time Moves media forward 30 seconds for videos and live TV one music track or one DVD chapter Displays the previous window The button provides more details on a TV program than is listed in the Guide Moves the cursor to navigate within Media Center windows Selects the desired action or window option It acts like the Enter Key If watching TV in full screen mode pressing OK switches back to the previous viewed channel Press again to toggle back It acts the same way as a Jump button on some TV remote controls Increases the volume while watching TV viewing DVD s or replaying CD s Decreases the volume while watching TV viewing DVD s or replaying CD s Opens Med
125. ation for your audio devices Problem Procedure No sound is heard Adjust the volume control dial Check the software volume settings 10 14 User s Manual Troubleshooting Problem External monitor Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices and to your monitor s documentation Problem Monitor does not turn on No display Display error occurs Modem Refer to Appendix C AT Commands and Appendix D S registers Problem Communication software can t initialize modem You can hear a dial tone but can t make a call You place a call but a connection can t be made Procedure Please check to see if the Volume indicator is lit up Please check to see if Mute is switched to Off Make sure the headphone connection is secure Procedure Make sure that the external monitor s power switch is on Confirm that the external monitor s power cable is plugged into a working power outlet Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the external monitor Press hot keys Fn F5 to change the display priority and make sure it is not set for the internal display Check that the cable connecting the external monitor to the computer is attached firmly If problems persist contact your dealer Procedure Make sure the computer s internal modem settings are correct Refer to Phone and Modem Properties in the Control Panel If the call is going through a PBX machine make sure th
126. avoid risk of lost data always make back up copies of data by periodically storing it on an external storage medium For optimum performance use your computer product only under recommended conditions Read additional restrictions under Environmental Conditions in your PC documentation Contact Toshiba technical service and support refer to TOSHIBA support section in Chapter 10 Troubleshooting for more information Memory Main System 2 Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system memory available for other computing activities The amount of main system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the graphics system applications utilized system memory size and other factors For PC s configured with 4 GB of system memory the full system memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and will vary by model and system configuration Battery Lifes Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model configuration applications power management settings and features utilized as well as the natural performance variations produced by the design of individual components Published battery life numbers are achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time of publication Recharge time varies depending on usage Battery may not charge while computer is consuming full power
127. aximum temperature Conditions Altitude from sea level User s Manual Specifications Operating 60 to 3 000 meters Non operating 60 to 10 000 meters maximum Power Requirements AC adaptor 100 240 volts AC 50 or 60 hertz cycles per second Computer 15 VDC 8 0 amperes Built in Modem Network control unit NCU Type of NCU AA Type of line Telephone line analog only Type of dialing Pulse Tone Control command AT commands EIA 578 commands Monitor function Computer s speaker Communication specifications Communication Data Full duplex system Fax Half duplex Communication Data protocol ITU T Rec V 21 V 22 V 22bis V 32 Former CCITT V 32bis V 34 V 90 Bell 103 212A Fax ITU T Rec V 17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 ch2 Former CCITT A 2 User s Manual Specifications Communication speed Transmitting level Receiving level Input output impedance Error correcting Data compression Power supply Data transmission and reception 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 16800 19200 21600 24000 26400 28800 31200 33600 bps Data reception only with V 90 28000 29333 30666 32000 33333 34666 36000 37333 38666 40000 41333 42666 44000 45333 46666 48000 49333 50666 52000 53333 54666 56000 bps Fax 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 bps 10 dBm 10 to 40 dBm 600 ohms 30 MNP class 4 and ITU T V 42 MNP class 5 and ITU T V 42bis 3 3V supplied by computer User s Manual A
128. ay cause data to be lost Removing an SD card To remove an SD card follow the steps below 1 Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 2 Point to SD card and click 3 Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly 4 Grasp the card and remove it SD card Bridge media slot Figure 9 6 Removing an SD card 9 6 User s Manual Optional Devices E Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove the SD card or turn off the computer s power If you remove the SD card or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the SD card you may lose data or damage the card E Donot remove an SD card while the computer is in Standby or Hibernation mode The computer could become unstable or data in the SD card could be lost SD card care Set the write protect switch to the lock position if you do not want to record data E Do not write to an SD card if the battery power is low Low power could affect writing accuracy E Do not remove an SD card while read write is in progress E The SD card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way Do not try to force the card into the slot E Do not leave an SD card partially inserted in the slot Press the SD card until you hear it click into place E Do not twist or bend SD cards E Do not expose SD cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid E After using an SD card re
129. be somewhat brighter than when it operates on battery power The lower brightness level is intended to save battery power The speakers emit sound generated by your software as well as audio alarms such as generated by the system Keep foreign objects out of the speakers Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury Front operation button eleven buttons Power button Touch Pad Touch Pad control buttons Eleven buttons are available for use TV CD DVD Play Pause Stop Previous Next Record Brightness down Brightness up DOLBY TV out These buttons allow you to manage Audio Video run applications and access utilities Refer to Chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer for details Press the power button to turn the computer s power on and off A Touch Pad located in the palm rest is used to control the on screen pointer Refer to the Operating Basics section in Chapter 4 Operating Basics Control buttons below the Touch Pad let you select menu items or manipulate text and graphics designated by the on screen pointer 2 10 User s Manual The Grand Tour Fingerprint Sensor Just by swiping the finger against the fingerprint sensor the following functions will be enabled E Log
130. body If pain persists despite rest consult your doctor A number of books are available on ergonomics and repetitive strain injury or repetitive stress syndrome For more information on these topics or for pointers on exercises for such stress points as hands and wrists please check with your library or book vendor Also refer to the computer s Instruction Manual for Safety amp Comfort User s Manual 3 5 Getting Started Strategic Rest Breaks Take short strategically spaced rest breaks to avoid eye strain and body discomforts For more specific recommendations on the safety and comfort of your computer environment customers in the United States may visit the United States Department of Labor Occupational Safety amp Health Administration website at http Awww osha gov SLTC etools computerworkstations Other Things to Note E Never turn off the power while an application is running Doing so could cause loss of data E Use a virus check program and make sure it is updated regularly E Never turn off the power disconnect an external storage device or remove storage media during data read write Doing so can cause data loss E Never format storage media without checking its content Formatting destroys all stored data E Itis a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk or other main storage device to external media General storage media is not durable or stable over long periods of time and
131. button function 200 2 0c ee eee eee 8 2 Windows Mode 0 cece tees 8 2 Remote Controller ccc cece cece eee eens 8 5 Part Names of Remote Controller 00020 e ee eeee 8 5 Windows XP Media Center Edition 00e eee 8 5 Using the Remote Controller 0 00 cece eee eee eens 8 9 Connecting the Remote control receiver 0 00 0s 8 9 Operational range of the remote control 8 11 User s Manual xxi Table of Contents Installing Removing batteries 0 0 0 cece eee eee 8 12 Type of battery that can be used for the Remote Controller 8 13 Installing the batteries 2 0 ce ee 8 13 Replacing the batteries 0 0 cee eee eee 8 14 Watching the TV lt ssscirrrsrssssicssirsreissnsr ssnst ans 8 14 Activating Media Center for the first time 8 14 Changing settings 0 cece tees 8 14 Connecting the set top box ananasu eee ee 8 15 Starting for watch the TV 0 2 eee eee 8 15 Connecting the VIDEO IN port 0 0 00 cece eee eee 8 16 QoOsmioP layel fii ck eed ote ee a Ohare ee 8 16 Front operation button function 000 eee eee eee 8 16 QosmioPlayer mode 00 e cece eee tees 8 17 List of language COdeS 2 cece eee eee 8 26 Operational range of the remote control 8 29 Installing Removing batteries 0 0 cece eee 8 30 Type
132. changes you made will cause the system to reboot message is displayed 2 Press the Y key The configured settings are saved and the BIOS setup program ends The computer may reboot depending on the settings that were modified User s Manual G 5 TOSHIBA RAID G 6 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix H Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability Bluetooth Cards from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum FHSS radio technology and is compliant to E Bluetooth Specification Ver2 0 EDR as defined and approved by The Bluetooth Special Interest Group E Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The Bluetooth Special interest Group User s Manual H 1 Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability E Bluetooth wireless technology is a new innovative technology and TOSHIBA has not confirmed compatibility of its Bluetooth products with all computers and or equipment using Bluetooth wireless technology other than TOSHIBA portable computers Always use Bluetooth Cards from TOSHIBA in order to enable wireless networks over two or more up to a total of seven TOSHIBA portable computers using these cards Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on Web site http www toshiba europe com computers tnt bluetooth htm in Europe or http www pc support global toshiba
133. ck bitmap of HDMI device it is displayed as DVI Monitor Click Device Settings Confirm that Tread Digital Display as HDTV is checked 7 Select the Select TV format and select TV format that your HDMI device supports 8 Select the appearance of Windows desktop type at HDTV Overscan Compensation on Displaying movies on a External display device The Displaying movies on a External display device function is only available in nVIDIA models This section describes how to set up your system to display movies simultaneously on your computer s internal LCD and on an external TV or CRT monitor Follow the steps below 1 Open the Control Panel and click Appearance and Themes 2 Click Display 3 Select the Settings tab and click Advanced button 4 Select the GeForce Go 7300 or GeForce Go 7600 tab a Click the GeForce Go 7300 or GeForce Go 7600 button b Click Full Screen Video in the small menu 9 24 User s Manual Optional Devices i c From the Full screen device drop down menu select Primary display or Secondary display to enable movie display on an external TV or CRT monitor Primary Device Movies will be displayed full screen on the computer s internal LCD and in a window on the TV or CRT monitor Secondary Device Movies will be displayed full screen on the TV or CRT monitor and in a window on the computer s internal LCD Disable Movies will not be displayed on a TV or CRT monitor E
134. ck up a DVD R RW or DVD R RW disc that was made with other software on a different DVD R RW or DVD R RW recorder If you add data to a DVD R and DVD R disc that you have already recorded to you might not be able to read the added data under some circumstances It cannot be read in 16 bit operating systems such as Windows 98SE and Windows Me In Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6 or later to read added data In Windows 2000 you will need Service Pack 2 or later to read it Some DVD ROM and DVD ROM amp CD R RW drives cannot read added data regardless of the operating system RecordNow does not support recording to DVD RAM discs To record to a DVD RAM use Explorer or another utility When you back up a DVD disc be sure the source drive supports recording to DVD R RW or DVD R RW discs If the source drive does not support recording to DVD R RW or DVD R RW discs it might not be backed up correctly When you back up a DVD R DVD RW DVD R or DVD RW be sure to use the same type of disc You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD RW DVD RW or DVD RW disc Verification To verify that data is written or rewritten correctly follow the steps below before you write or rewrite a Data CD DVD 1 Click the Options button y on the RecordNow Console to open the Options panels Select the Data in the left side menu Mark the Verify data written to the disc after burning check box in the Data Options Click t
135. ck your computer Save the box and packing materials for future use Hardware Check to make sure you have all the following items E Qosmio G30 Portable Personal Computer AC adaptor and power cord 2 pin plug or 3 pin plug Modular cable VIDEO IN cable Used for connection to VIDEO IN port Refer to chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Remote Controller Remote control receiver Infrared transmitter cable Antenna adaptor Two AA manganese batteries for Remote Controller User s Manual Introduction Software Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition E The following software is preinstalled Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition TOSHIBA Utilities DVD Video Player InterVideo WinDVD Creator Fingerprint utility Is preinstalled with some models RecordNow Basic for TOSHIBA DLA for TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Power Saver TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA Assist TOSHIBA Controls TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool TOSHIBA Touch and Launch Is preinstalled in some regions TOSHIBA TouchPad On Off Utility TOSHIBA Zooming Utility TOSHIBA Picture Enhancement Utility TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format TOSHIBA Acoustic Silencer TOSHIBA Hotkey Utility for Display Devices TOSHIBA Display Device Change Utility TOSHIBA Password Utility Online manual mM Product Recovery Media Documentation Qosmio G30 Portable Personal Computer User s Manual User s Manual QosmioPlayer Guide
136. completely discharged Leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging User s Manual 6 9 Power The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions E The battery has not been used for a long time E The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for a long time A cool battery is installed in a warm computer In such case follow the steps below 1 Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power on until the power automatically shuts off 2 Plug in the AC adaptor 3 Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows blue Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal capacity Leaving the AC adaptor connected will shorten battery life At least once a month run the computer on battery power until the battery is fully discharged then recharge the battery Monitoring battery capacity i Remaining battery power can be monitored in TOSHIBA Power Saver E Wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before trying to monitor the remaining operating time The computer needs this time to check the battery s remaining capacity and to calculate the remaining operating time based on the current power consumption rate and remaining battery capacity The actual remaining operating time may differ slightly f
137. connection between the LAN jack and the LAN HUB If the following procedures do not restore LAN access consult your LAN administrator For more information on wireless communication refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics Problem Cannot access Wireless LAN Procedure Make sure the computer s wireless communication switch is set to on If problems persist contact your LAN administrator 10 16 User s Manual Troubleshooting Bluetooth For more information on wireless communication refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics Problem Cannot access Bluetooth device TV output signal Problem Display on TV is poor No display pmi o Procedure Make sure the computer s wireless communication switch is set to on Make sure the Bluetooth Manager is running and the power to the Bluetooth device is turned on Make sure no optional Bluetooth PC card is installed in the computer The built in Bluetooth function and an optional Bluetooth PC card cannot operate simultaneously If problems persist contact your dealer Procedure Make sure the TV type is correct for your area NTSC US JAPAN PAL Europe Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls on the external monitor Press hotkeys Fn F5 to change the display Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard If problems persist contact your dealer If you turn the computer off into Standby Mode while the display is on TV the computer will s
138. converts modulates digital data for transmission over telephone lines and then converts modulated data demodulates to digital format where received monitor A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display alphanumeric characters or graphic images See also CRT motherboard A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit board in processing equipment It usually contains integrated circuits that perform the processor s basic functions and provides connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions Sometimes called a main board N non system disk A formatted floppy disk you can use to store programs and data but you cannot use to start the computer See system disk nonvolatile memory Memory usually read only ROM that is capable of permanently storing information Turning the computer s power off does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory numeric keypad overlay A feature that allows you to use certain keys on the keyboard to perform numeric entry or to control cursor and page movement O OCR Optical Character Recognition reader A technique or device that uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a storage device online state A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to receive or transmit data operating system A group of programs that controls the basic operation of a computer Operating system functions include interp
139. ction Result code CONNECT 32000 EC CONNECT 36000 EC CONNECT 40000 EC CONNECT 44000 EC CONNECT 48000 EC CONNECT 52000 EC CONNECT 56000 EC CONNECT 28000 EC CONNECT 29333 EC CONNECT 30666 EC CONNECT 33333 EC CONNECT 34666 EC CONNECT 37333 EC CONNECT 38666 EC CONNECT 41333 EC CONNECT 42666 EC CONNECT 45333 EC CONNECT 46666 EC CONNECT 49333 EC CONNECT 50666 EC CONNECT 53333 EC CONNECT 54666 EC Description Connection at 32000 bps Connection at 36000 bps Connection at 40000 bps Connection at 44000 bps Connection at 48000 bps Connection at 52000 bps Connection at 56000 bps Connection at 28000 bps Connection at 29333 bps Connection at 30666 bps Connection at 33333 bps Connection at 34666 bps Connection at 37333 bps Connection at 38666 bps Connection at 41333 bps Connection at 42666 bps Connection at 45333 bps Connection at 46666 bps Connection at 49333 bps Connection at 50666 bps Connection at 53333 bps Connection at 54666 bps E 2 User s Manual V 90 EC stands for the Error Control method which appears only when the extended result codes configuration option is enabled EC is replaced by one of the following symbols depending on the error control method used V42bis v42 NoEC AT Command V90 V90 0 V90 1 V 42 error control and V 42bis data compression V 42 error control only No error control protocol V 90 Dial Line Rate V90 sets the maximum V 90 downstr
140. ctrolyte fluid should contact any part of your body immediately wash it off under running water to help prevent skin rashes If electrolyte fluid should contact your clothes promptly remove them to help prevent the electrolyte fluid from contacting your body possibly resulting in serious injury 13 Always immediately turn the power off and disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket if you observe any of the following conditions Offensive or unusual odor Excessive heat Discoloration Deformation Smoke HM Other unusual event during use such as abnormal sound In such an event immediately remove the battery pack from the PC In some instances you might have to wait for the PC to cool down before removing the battery pack in order to avoid any possible minor injury due to heat exposure Do not turn on the PC s power again until an authorized Toshiba service provider has checked it for safety Continued use could cause a fire or rupture possibly resulting in serious injury or PC failure including but not limited to the loss of data 14 Always dispose of used battery packs in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations Put insulating tape such as cellophane tape on the electrode during transportation to avoid a possible short circuit fire or electric shock Failure to do so could possibly result in serious injury 15 Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before attempting to charge the bat
141. cy WEP data encryption based on the 152 bit encryption algorithm Atheros module type E Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP data encryption based on the 128 bit encryption algorithm Intel module type E Advanced Encryption Standard AES data encryption based on 256 bit encryption algorithm E Wi Fi Protected Access WPA E Wake up on Wireless LAN Intel module type E The numerical values for display are the theoretical maximums for Wireless LAN standards The actual values may differ E The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment obstacles access point design and configuration and client design and software hardware configurations The Transmit Rate at X Mbit s is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802 11 a b g standard The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed E The Wake on Wireless function is effective only when it is connected with AP This function becomes invalid when the connection is cut 4 30 User s Manual Operating Basics Security E TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable WEP encryption functionality otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider using a wireless connection If this occurs the outsider may illegally access your system eavesdrop or cause the loss or destruction of stored data E TOSHIBA
142. d Seating and posture Maintain a comfortable working posture when using your PC where your body joints are naturally aligned to reduce stress on different parts of your body Consider the following Below eye level 90 angles Foot rest et i Figure 3 1 Posture and positioning of the computer E Keep hands wrists and forearms straight in line and roughly parallel to the floor E Keep head level or bent slightly forward forward facing and balanced Generally the head is in line with the torso E Keep shoulders relaxed and let upper arms hang normally at the side of the body E Keep elbows in close to the body and bent E Keep feet fully supported by floor or foot rest E Keep back fully supported with appropriate lumbar support when sitting vertical or leaning back slightly M Keep thighs and hips supported by a well padded seat cushion and generally parallel to the floor E Keep knees about the same height as the hips with the feet slightly forward 3 4 User s Manual Getting Started Lighting Select the right level of illumination and place your PC appropriately to minimize glare from overhead lights desk lamps and windows Glare on the LCD or monitor may cause eye strain eye fatigue or headaches Consider the following suggestions regarding lighting your work environment E Position the PC so that the light source does not shine or reflect directly
143. d color on the attached sheet The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be legitimately connected to the Telecom network The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product and in the sales literature as required in PTC 100 The charge for a Telepermit assessment is 337 50 An additional charge of 337 50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against non Telecom New Zealand Specifications 112 50 is charged for each variation when submitted at the same time as the original An invoice for NZ1237 50 will be sent under separate cover Following information is only for EU member states The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product For more detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product User s Manual xiii User s Manual Optical disc drive safety instructions 1 Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section Panasonic Shikoku DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording UJ 84
144. d escapes that are intended as a command to the modem execute To interpret and execute an instruction Extended Capability Port An industry standard that provides a data buffer switchable forward and reverse data transmission and run length encoding RLE support F fast infrared An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps file A collection of related information a file can contain data programs or both firmware A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and directs a microprocessor s activities floppy disk A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data floppy disk drive FDD An electromechanical device that reads and writes to floppy disks Fn esse A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys folder An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders format The process of readying a blank disk for its first use Formatting establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk function keys The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to perform certain functions User s Manual Glossary 7 Glossary G gigabyte GB A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes See also megabyte graphics Drawings pictures or other images such as charts or graphs to present information H hard disk A non
145. d or F another object near the Optical Disk Drive slot Optical Disk Drive slot Eject button Figure 4 5 Pressing the eject button 3 Gently hold the CD DVD by the edges and pull it horizontally Figure 4 6 Removing a CD DVD User s Manual 4 13 Operating Basics Writing CD DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD R RW or DVD R RW R RW RAM discs The following applications for writing are provided RecordNow and DLA licensed by Sonic Solutions and InterVideo s WinDVD Creator Platinum 2 E Refer to the Writable discs Chapter 2 for the details about the types of J l writable CD DVD discs E Do not turn off the power of the Optical Disk Drive while the computer is accessing the drive If you turn off the power you may lose data Important message Before you write or rewrite to CD R RW or DVD R RW R RW RAM discs read and follow all setup and operating instructions in this section If you fail to do so the DVD Super Multi drive may not function properly and you may fail to write or rewrite lose data or incur other damage Legal Footnotes TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following E Damage to any CD R RW or DVD R RW R RW RAM disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product E Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD R RW or DVD R RW R RW RAM disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with
146. d to the AC adaptor Figure 3 3 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor 3 pin plug 1 The Universal AC Adaptor and power cord bundled with this product may differ depending on the product model Depending on the model a 2 pin plug or 3 pin plug set of the above may be bundled 2 Connect the AC adaptor s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the back side of the computer lt Ar aii x DC IN 15V jack Op Figure 3 4 Connecting the adaptor to the computer 3 Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet The Battery and DC IN indicators on the front of the computer should glow 3 8 User s Manual Getting Started Opening the display The display panel can be rotated in a wide range of angles for optimal viewing 1 Push the display latch on the front of the computer to unlatch the display panel 2 While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body is not raised lift the panel slowly Adjust the angle of the panel to provide optimal clarity As the display panel cannot be opened until 180 degrees please be careful of the angle when flipping open the display panel pio JN Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer Figure 3 5 Opening the display Turning on the power This section describes how to turn on the power F E After you turn on the power for the first time do not
147. data 5 Do not expose to direct sunlight extreme heat or cold Do not place heavy objects on your CD DVDs 6 If your CD DVDs become dusty or dirty wipe them with a clean dry cloth Wipe from the center out do not wipe in a circular direction around the CD DVD If necessary use a cloth dampened in water or a neutral cleaner Do not use benzine thinner or similar cleaner Floppy disks J The USB floppy disk drive is available only as an option 1 Store your floppy disks in the container they came in to protect them and keep them clean If a floppy disk is dirty do not use cleaning fluid Clean it with a soft damp cloth 2 Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy disk You could permanently damage it and lose data 3 Always handle floppy disks with care to prevent the loss of stored data Always apply the floppy disk label in the correct location Never apply a new label on top of an existing one The label could come loose and damage the floppy drive 4 Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy disk label Pencil lead dust could cause a system malfunction Always use a felt tipped pen When writing a title on a label first write on the label then apply the label to the floppy disk 5 Never put a floppy disk in a location where water or other liquid may contact it or where it is excessively damp It could cause data loss Never use a wet or damp floppy disk It could damage the floppy disk dri
148. del that can be written in to DVD is attached When using WinDVD Creator Platinum You can record video back to your digital camcorder via i LINK IEEE1394 using WinDVD Creator Platinum However there is a case where you may find that playback sound is choppy if this is the case follow the below instructions 1 Click start and select the Control Panel Click the Performance and Maintenance icon in the Control Panel Click the System icon in the Performance and Maintenance window Click the Advanced tab in the System Properties window Click the Settings icon in the Performance section Click the Advanced tab in the Performance Options window Click the Change icon in the virtual memory section Select the Custom size button in the Virtual Memory window 9 Specify much higher values for Initial size and Maximum size 10 Click the Set button in the Virtual Memory window 11 Click the OK button in the Virtual Memory window ONOARWYD User s Manual 4 19 Operating Basics How to make a DVD Video Simplified steps for making a DVD Video from video data captured from a DV Camcorder 1 2 7 8 Click Start All Programs InterVideo WinDVD Creator2 InterVideo WinDVD Creator to launch WinDVD Creator Click Capture button then capture the video data from the DV Camcorder via IEEE1394 Click Edit button then drag the video clips from Video Library tab to the edit track Click M
149. dem in Japan with any other selection Connecting To connect the modular cable follow the steps below The modular cable that comes with the computer must be used to connect a modem Connect the end of the modular cable with the core to the computer 4 28 User s Manual Operating Basics IN E Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a PC system failure E Connect the built in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines E Never connect the built in modem to a digital line ISDN E Never connect the built in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange PBX E Never connect the built in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices E Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm If you see lightning or hear thunder immediately turn off the PC An electric surge caused by the storm may result in a system failure loss of data or hardware damage 1 Plug one end of the modular cable into the computer s modem jack 2 Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack h fo Telephone jack Modem jack Figure 4 9 Connecting the internal modem JN Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is connected If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or hard disk drive connected to a 16 bit PC card you might experience the following mod
150. devices does not exceed 5 3 The standard connecting arrangement telephone jack type for this equipment is jack type s USOC RJ11C The IC registration number of the modem is shown below Canada 4005B ATHENS Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand Modem warning notice for Australia Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid Austel permit This modem has been designed to specifically configure to ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country region selection is set to Australia The use of other country region setting while the modem is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem being operated in a non compliant manner To verify that the country region is correctly set enter the command ATI which displays the currently active setting To set the country region permanently to Australia enter the following command sequence AT TE 1 ATS133 1 AT amp F AT amp W AT TE 0 ATZ Failure to set the modem to the Australia country region setting as shown above will result in the modem being operated in a non compliant manner Consequently there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of 12 000 for the connection of non permitted equipment User s Manual User s Manual Notes for use of this device in New Zealand E The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of responsibili
151. displayed Confirm the message and that there is a checkmark in Run Interactive Tutorial and click Next 5 The Correct Swipe Procedure screen is displayed Confirm the message and click Next 6 The Scanning Practice screen is displayed You can practice swiping your finger When you have finished practicing swiping your finger click Next 4 8 User s Manual Operating Basics 7 The User s Fingers screen is displayed Based on the illustration select the finger to be recognized and then click Next Previously enrolled fingerprints would have green check marks The fingerprint being enrolled now would have a red check mark If any of the previously enrolled fingerprints is selected again the latest information will be enrolled and previous information over written 8 The Advanded Security screen is displayed Select whether to enable the security function and click Next 9 The Finalization screen is displayed Click Finish This completes the fingerprint registration process Window Logon via Fingerprint Authentication In place of the usual Windows logon by ID and password fingerprint authentication also allows logon to Windows This is useful especially when many users are using the PCs as user selection can be skipped Fingerprint Authentication Procedure 1 Start up the computer 2 The Logon Authorization screen is displayed Choose any of the enrolled fingers and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor
152. displayed for example to prompt the user to enter the password Supervisor password To set a supervisor password follow the steps below 1 Click start 2 Click Run 3 Enter the following C Program Files Toshiba Windows Utilities SVPWTool TOSPU EXE If you set a supervisor password some functions might be restricted when a user logs on with the user password This utility lets you do the following E Register delete or change the supervisor password E Specify restrictions for general users Starting the computer by password pmi o If you have already registered a password there are two ways to start the computer E Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint Power on Security If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons push the BkSp key to skip the fingerprint authentication screen You can try to swipe the fingerprint up to five times If you failed fingerprint authentication more than five times you must enter the password manually to start the computer E Enter the password manually The password is necessary only if the computer was shut down in boot mode It is not needed in Standby Mode 1 Turn on the power as described in Chapter 3 Getting Started The following message will appear in the LCD B Password At this point the hotkeys Fn F1 to F9 do n
153. dition of the cord and terminals If the cord is frayed or damaged replace it If the terminals are soiled wipe them with cotton or a clean cloth If the AC adaptor still does not power the computer contact your dealer Battery If you suspect a problem with the battery check the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator For information on indicators and battery operation refer to Chapter 6 Power Problem Procedure Battery doesn t power The battery may be discharged Connect the AC the computer adaptor to charge the battery Battery doesn t charge If the battery is completely discharged it will not when the AC adaptor begin charging immediately Wait a few minutes is attached Battery If the battery still does not charge make sure the indicator does not outlet of the AC adaptor is supplying power Plug glow orange in an appliance and see if it works If it doesn t try another power source Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the touch If the battery is too hot or too cold it will not charge properly Let it reach room temperature User s Manual 10 5 Troubleshooting Problem Battery doesn t power the computer as long as expected Real Time Clock Problem The following message is Displayed on the LCD screen RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is inconsistent Press F1 key to set Date Time Password Problem Cannot enter password Procedure Unplug the
154. e Stop Previous track Next track Changes the brightness level of LCD 8 gt 7 gt 2 gt 1 Changes the brightness level of LCD 1 gt 2 gt 7 gt 8 Open the Dolby dialog box Switch the display output to TV 8 4 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Remote Controller This computer includes a TV Remote Controller which enables you to perform some functions of your computer from a distant location Part Names of Remote Controller The following figure shows the buttons on the Remote Controller Refer to the descriptions on the next page for the functions of each button Windows XP Media Center Edition This section describes the Remote Controller provided with a Windows XP Media Center Edition model You can use your remote control with Media Center to play CDs DVDs and videos to view pictures and to watch and record television programs The remote control helps you navigate the Media Center windows on your computer just as a cable TV remote control navigates cable TV options or controls the playback of a movie in a VCR or DVD player Using the remote control you can E Navigate and control all Media Center windows E Control the video or live TV display lm Place the computer in and out of standby mode Before using the Remote Controller provided with a Windows XP Media Center Edition model you must first connect the remote control receiver that is als
155. e Disable OK RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT lt RATE gt Enable Disable OK RING NO CARRIER ERROR NODIALTONE CONNECT lt RATE gt Disable Enable OK RING NO CARRIER ERROR BUSY CONNECT lt RATE gt BLACKLISTED Enable Enable OK RING NO CARRIER ERROR NODIALTONE BUSY CONNECT lt RATE gt DELAYED BLACKLISTED REORDER WARBLE CALL WAITING DETECTED Enable Enable OK RING NO CARRIER ERROR NODIALTONE BUSY CONNECT lt RATE gt RRING NO BONGTONE DELAYED BLACKLISTED REORDER WARBLE CALL WAITING DETECTED User s Manual C 5 AT Commands Dial tone detect Disabled The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial tone Enabled The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone and disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds Busy tone detect Disabled The modem ignores any busy tones it receives Enabled The modem monitors for busy tones Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 4 5 ERROR Otherwise Zn Recall stored profile The modem performs a soft reset and restores recalls the configuration profile according to the parameter supplied If no parameter is specified zero is assumed Either ZO or Z1 restores the profile Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise amp Cn Data Carrier Detect DCD control Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem DCD normally t
156. e communication application s tone dial detection feature is disabled You can also use the ATX command Refer to Appendix C AT Commands Make sure the settings are correct in your communications application User s Manual 10 15 Troubleshooting LAN Problem After making a call you can t hear a ring Communication is cut off unexpectedly A CONNECT display is quickly replaced by No CARRIER Character display becomes garbled during a communication You cannot receive an incoming call Problem Cannot access LAN Wireless LAN Procedure Make sure the tone or pulse selection in your communications application is set correctly You can also use the ATD command Refer to Appendix C AT Commands The computer will automatically cut off communication when connection with the carrier is not successful for a set time interval Try lengthening this time interval Check the error control setting in your communications application You can also use the AT N command Refer to Appendix C AT Commands In data transmission make sure the parity bit and stop bit settings correspond with those of the remote computer Check the flow control and communication protocol Check the rings before auto answer setting in your communications application You can also use the ATSO command Refer to Appendix D S registers If problems persist contact your dealer Procedure Check for a firm cable
157. e text to describe many computer operations A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they appear on the keyboard For example Enter identifies the Enter key xxviii User s Manual Preface Key operation Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys We identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign For example Ctrl C means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press C If three keys are used hold down the first two and at the same time press the third ABC When procedures require an action such as clicking an icon or entering text the icon s name or the text you are to type in is represented in the type face you see to the left Display D Names of windows or icons or text generated by E ABC the computer that appear on its display screen are presented in the type face you see to the left Messages Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your attention Each type of message is identified as shown below JN Pay attention A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your equipment 7 Please read A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of I your equipment Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow instructions User s Manual XXIX Pr
158. e the battery status Flashing orange Orange Blue No light The battery charge is low The AC adaptor must be connected to recharge the battery Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and charging the battery Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the battery is fully charged Under any other conditions the indicator does not light 6 2 User s Manual Power e If the battery becomes too hot while it is being charged the charge will I LI i stop and the Battery indicator will go out When the battery s temperature falls to a normal range charge will resume This occurs whether the computer s power is on or off DC IN indicator Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC adaptor connected Blue Flashing orange No light Power indicator Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and supplying proper power to the computer Indicates a problem with the power supply Plug the AC adaptor into another outlet If it still does not operate properly contact your dealer Under any other conditions the indicator does not light Check the Power indicator to determine the power status Blue Blinking orange No light Battery types Indicates power is being supplied to the computer and the computer is turned on Indicates power is being supplied to the computer while the computer is in Standby mode The indicator turns on for one second and off for two sec
159. e to the laser beam do not try to open the enclosure VORSICHT Dieses Ger t enth lt ein Laser System und ist als LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT klassifiziert F r den richtigen Gebrauch dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die Bedienungsanleitung sorgf ltig durch und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz auf Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell auftreten benachrichtigen Sie bitte die n chste autorisierte Service Vertretung Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Ger t nicht ge ffnet werden ADVARSEL Denne m rking er anbragt udvendigt p apparatet og indikerer at apparatet arbejder med laserstr ler af klasse 1 hviket betyder at der anvendes laserstrlier af svageste klasse og at man ikke p apparatets yderside kan bilve udsat for utilladellg kraftig str ling APPARATET BOR KUN BNES AF FAGFOLK MED S RLIGT KENDSKAB TIL APPARATER MED LASERSTRALER Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her gengivne advarselsm kning som advarer imod at foretage s danne indgreb i apparatet at man kan komme til at udsatte sig for laserstr ling User s Manual XV User s Manual OBS Apparaten innehaller laserkomponent som avger laserstraining verstigande gr nsen f r laserklass 1 VAROITUS Suojakoteloa si saa avata Laite sis lt laserdiodin joka lahetaa n kym t nt silmilie vaarallista lasers teily CAUTION USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCED
160. eam that the modem attempts to connect V 90 disabled V 90 enabled automatic speed selection maximum modem speed default User s Manual E 3 V 90 E 4 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Wireless LAN Appendix F This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up and running with a minimum of parameters Card Specifications Form Factor Compatibility Network Operating System Media Access Protocol Data Rate PCI Express Mini Card IEEE 802 11 Standard for Wireless LANs Wi Fi Wireless Fidelity certified by the Wi Fi Alliance The Wi Fi CERTIFIED logo is a certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance Microsoft Windows Networking CSMA CA Collision Avoidance with Acknowledgment ACK Theoretical maximum speed 54Mbps IEEE802 11a 802 119 Theoretical maximum speed 11 Mbps IEEE802 11b The Transmit Rate at X Mbit s is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802 11 a b g standard The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to H Country region where the product was purchased E Type of product User s Manual Wireless LAN Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in the license free 2 4GHz and 5GHz band local r
161. ect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable The AC adaptor must remain connected during LAN use If you disconnect the AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN the system may hang up E Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable Otherwise malfunctions or damage may occur E Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is connected to the LAN jack Otherwise malfunctions or damage may occur 1 Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices connected to the computer 2 Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack Press gently until you hear the latch click into place LAN jack Figure 4 10 Connecting the LAN cable 3 Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector Check with your LAN administrator before connecting to a hub 2 When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN the LAN Active l indicator glows orange When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but is not exchanging data the Link indicator glows green Disconnecting LAN cable To disconnect the LAN cable follow the steps below Make sure the LAN Active indicator orange LED is out before you disconnect the computer from the LAN 1 Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer s LAN jack and pull out the connector 2 Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub in the same manner Check with your LAN administrator before disconnecting from the hub 4 34 User s Manu
162. ee eee eee 10 1 Preliminary Checklist ccs occ oo vee da eee Wee VE ture eee 10 2 Analyzing the problem 0 0 0 eee ee 10 2 Hardware and system checklist 0000 e eee e eee 10 3 System stat UD sereta wind Peewee ae wb ee eee ded oe eet 10 3 Self test sos i ciio wake eae bla het eee Sedge dk ere eae 10 4 POWG mir oe cclewehwee ae ealee wd ee cama e e San eee ed 10 4 PassWord aiaeei aa ed Oe oe ete a Bod ded eer eR 10 6 Keyboard sc 2u0oe dake boa ewes eRe ee Aan ees 10 7 Internal LCD display panel 1 0 0 0 00 0 cee eee eee 10 7 Hard disk drives cect sk sol eee ork eee pinia ee ard meee ee 10 8 DVD Super Multi drive a an eee 10 8 USB floppy disk drive 1 2 cee eee 10 9 PO cardi sci cee o a E RE hears sees we Gla vate wb gS 10 9 ExpressCard s pesan esse perir See Odd ee eee beat oe ES 10 10 SD Cal tiated ect e dae E a ita E Hee ea as hee es 10 10 User s Manual xxiii Table of Contents Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro 1 0 eee eee 10 10 XD picture ard esaii rannu aeiaai a ana e dee E aa 10 11 MultiMediaCard 1 ketenes 10 11 Infrared receiver WINdOW 0 00 eee 10 11 Pointing device 00 eee ee eee 10 12 Fingerprint Sensor 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 10 13 USB deVICE 20 2 ents e Meeadi veal ARA E eae designs Eades 10 14 Memory expansion 00 cece teens 10 14 Sound system erias oe Ea EEE E eee 10 14 External monitor o cac acacesia nucente sea ee 10 15 M dem e
163. een Enabled is Dual Core mode Disabled is Single Core mode Enabled Enables Core Multi Processing functions Default Disabled Disables Core Multi Processing functions Execute Disable Bit Capability pmi o The configuration for the Execute Disable Bit Capability is carried out in the BIOS setup program This setting configures the Execute Disable Bit function of the CPU It is displayed on the first page of the setup screen This function is specific to Intel processors and when activated helps to reduce security threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of malicious buffer overflow attacks when combined with a supporting operating system such as Windows XP Available Makes the processor s Execute Disable Bit Capability available for use Not Available Disables the processor s Execute Disable Bit Capability so that it is not available for use Default System configuration changes other than changes to this setting should be made within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup TOSHIBA Password Utility TOSHIBA Power Saver Windows Device Manager and so forth User s Manual 7 9 HW Setup Virtualization Technology Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization Technology installed in the CPU The configuration for the Virtualization Technology is carried out in the BIOS setup program This setting is displayed on the first page of the setup
164. eface XXX User s Manual Qosmio G30 General Precautions TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety minimize strain and withstand the rigors of portability However certain precautions should be observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the computer Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions included in the text of the manual Stress injury Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety amp Comfort It contains information on prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists than can be caused by extensive keyboard use Chapter 3 Getting Started also includes information on workspace design posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress Heat injury E Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer If the computer is used for long periods its surface can become very warm While the temperature will not feel hot to the touch if you maintain physical contact with the computer for a long time if you rest the computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest for example your skin might suffer low heat injury E lf the computer has been used for a long time avoid direct contact with the metal plate supporting the I O ports It can become hot E The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use This condition does not indicate a malfunction If you need to transport the AC adaptor disconnect it and let it c
165. eft button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or graphics with the pointer Press the right button to display a context menu or operate another function according to the software you are using User s Manual Operating Basics Dual a ty IMM _ O You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the left button Click Tap once Double click Tap twice Drag and drop Tap to select the object you want to move Leave your finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and move your finger along the pad to move the object The upper right tap zone will be designated as the Mode Button which switches the Touch Pad from Pointing Mode to Dual Mode Mode Operation When the Touch Pad is in Dual Mode it is divided into eight areas These areas include the Mode Button the volume control zone and six action buttons While in Dual Mode the Touch Pad will not function as a pointing B Qosmio ty UI m A A Ss Ay Figure 4 2 Dual Mode Pad There are two ways to exit Dual Mode one is to tap the mode button and the other is to tap one of the six action buttons Mode Button Tapping within this button s zone will cause the Touch Pad to revert to normal Pointing Mode Volume Control Placing a finger in the volume zone and moving upwards will increase the volume Placing a finger in the volume zone and moving down will decrease the volume
166. elect either the internal LCD or an external computer CRT as the display device the next time is switched on User s Manual T07 Troubleshooting i LINK IEEE1394 device Problem i LINK device does not function Video Playback Problem DVD does not play smoothly when using the Windows Media Center Edition of the DVD playing software Procedure Make sure the cable is securely connected to the computer and to the device Make sure the device s power is turned on Click start click Control Panel and double click the Add Hardware icon Follow the on screen directions Restart Windows If problems persist contact your dealer Procedure Try setting the configuration in the BIOS setup However note that when the BIOS setup configuration is modified the power saving function of PCI Express becomes disabled Refer to Chapter 7 HW Setup for more information Set the PCI Express Link ASPM in the BIOS setup using the following steps 1 Press the F1 key The BIOS setup screen will appear 2 Setthe PCI Express Link ASPM to Disabled in BATTERY 3 Press the End key A confirmation message will appear 4 Press the Y key The BIOS setup will terminate and the computer will reboot If problems persist contact your dealer Disposing of PC and PC batteries E Discard this PC in accordance with ordinances or rules of local regulations For further information contact your local government
167. em problems E Modem speed is slow or communication is interrupted E Skips may occur in sound pio Disconnecting To disconnect the modular cable follow the steps below 1 Pinch the lever on the connector in the telephone jack and pull out the connector 2 Disconnect the modular cable from the computer s modem jack in the same manner User s Manual 4 29 Operating Basics Wireless communications The computer s wireless communication function supports both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth devices All models are provided with Wireless Communication switch Some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions Wireless LAN The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing radio technology that complies with IEEE802 11 Wireless LAN standard Revision A B or G Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake up on Wireless LAN is enabled The Wake up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when the system is off Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature Supported features It supports the following features E Theoretical maximum speed 54Mbps IEEE802 11a 802 119 E Theoretical maximum speed 11Mbps IEEE802 11b E Frequency Channel Selection Revision A 5 GHz Revision B G 2 4 GHz E Roaming over multiple channels Card Power Management E Wired Equivalent Priva
168. em with QosmioPlayer This is because the QosmioEngine not only displays video images in high quality but will also do the same for any noise they may contain User s Manual 8 33 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer nVIDIA GeForce Go 7300 i To enjoy vivid attire To enjoy a cam atmosphere in a toom Theater To entoy a theater be picture n a dyiered toom Extended settings on Clow Maun O m Nose in Se low Medum tih ico C e Overtrive N orf x cra Lae Figure 8 21 TOSHIBA Picture Enhancement Utility on nVIDIA GeForce Go 7300 model Available image quality modes Three image quality modes are available Dynamic To enjoy a vivid picture Standard To enjoy a calm atmosphere in a room Theater To enjoy a theater like picture in a darkened room Available sharpness levels Three sharpness levels are available Low Medium High Image sharpness is emphasized if a higher level is chosen This function is available Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition or InterVideo WinDVD 8 34 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Available noise reduction levels Three noise reduction levels are available Low Medium High Image noise is reduced and the screen image becomes smooth and sharp if a higher level is chosen This function is available InterVideo WinDVD About LCD Overdrive
169. enance and open Power Options 3 Select the Hibernate window in the Power Options Properties select the Enable hibernation check box and click the Apply button 4 Open TOSHIBA Power Saver 5 Select the Setup Action window 6 Enable the desired Hibernation settings for When I press the power button and When close the lid 7 Click the OK button Data save in Hibernation Mode When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode the computer takes a moment to save current memory data to the hard disk During this time the HDD indicator will light After you turn off the computer and memory is saved to the hard disk turn off the power to any peripheral devices Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge Restarting the computer Certain conditions require that you reset the system For example if E You change certain computer settings E An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard commands E There are three ways to reset the computer system 1 Click start then click Turn off computer From the Turn off computer menu select Restart 2 Press Ctrl Alt Del to display the Windows Task Manager then select Shutdown and Restart 3 Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds Wait 10 to 15 seconds then turn the power on again by pressing the power button Restoring the preinstalled software 3 14 User s Manual
170. er s Manual Optional Devices 5 Lift the cover up and out to remove it Hard disk drive cover Figure 9 15 Removing the Hard disk drive cover 6 With the hard disk drive in a vertical position lift it straight up and away from the connector oe ZA gt Hard disk drive pack Figure 9 16 Removing the Hard disk drive pack Installing the Hard disk drive pack To install the Hard disk drive pack follow the steps below 1 Move the connector until it is vertical 2 Hold the hard disk drive vertically with its label on the left 3 Connect the hard disk drive to the connector Ensure that the hard disk drive is connected to the connector in a vertical T position If the hard disk drive is slanted and connected to the connector it might damage the connector User s Manual 9 17 Optional Devices 4 With the connector connected lower the hard disk drive down to the storage position Hard disk drive pack Figure 9 17 Installing the Hard disk drive pack 5 Seat the cover and press down until the latches click into place 6 Secure the cover with a screw 7 Turn your computer over USB floppy disk drive USB floppy disk drive accommodates 1 44 megabyte or 720 kilobyte floppy disks It connects to the USB port USB connector Disk In Use Indicator Floppy disk slot Eject button Figure 9 18 USB floppy disk drive USB connector Insert this connector into one of the USB ports of your c
171. er during a thunderstorm and are connecting the TV tuner to an outside antenna you should operate your computer using AC power mode The AC adaptor offers some protection against but does not entirely prevent possible electric shock caused by lightning For complete protection do not operate your computer during a thunderstorm 1 Save data shutdown Windows and turn off the power User s Manual 4 23 Operating Basics 2 Connect the antenna adaptor to the TV antenna port of your computer TV antenna port Antenna adaptor Figure 4 7 Connecting the antenna adaptor 3 Connect the antenna cable to the other end of the antenna adaptor Antenna adaptor Antenna cable Figure 4 8 Connecting the antenna cable F When you have been using a descrambler to receive the programs on cable TV or satellite broadcasting connect the descrambler to the antenna cable 4 24 User s Manual Operating Basics Sound System This section describes audio controls including sound levels and power management Volume Control The Volume Control utility lets you control the audio volume in Windows for both playback and recording E To launch Volume Control for playback click start point to All Programs point to Accessories point to Entertainment and click Volume Control E To launch Recording Control click Options point to Properties choose Recording and click OK H To view details of the Volume Control cl
172. er off when the display panel is closed and turns it back on when the panel is opened You can specify the setting in the When I close the lid item of the Setup Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver When battery power is exhausted to the point that computer operation cannot be continued the system automatically enters Hibernation and shuts down You can specify the setting in the Setup Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver To protect from overheating the CPU has an internal temperature sensor If the computer s internal temperature rises to a certain level the cooling fan is turned on or the processing speed is lowered Use the Cooling Method item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver User s Manual Introduction Hibernation Standby Utilities This feature lets you turn off the power without exiting from your software The contents of main memory are saved to the hard disk when you turn on the power again you can continue working right where you left off Refer to the Turning off the power section in Chapter 3 Getting Started for details If you have to interrupt your work you can turn off the power without exiting from your software Data is maintained in the computer s main memory When you turn on the power again you can continue working right where you left off This section describes preinstalled utilities and tells how to start them For details on operations refer to each utility s online man
173. ess 3945BG 3945ABG Network Connection or Atheros AR5006EG AR5006EX Wireless Network Adapter and then select enable The computer has built in support for Ethernet LAN 10 megabits per second 10BASE T Fast Ethernet LAN 100 megabits per second 100BASE TX and Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000 megabits per second 1000BASE T Some models are equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet LAN This section describes how to connect disconnect to a LAN Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake up on LAN is enabled The Wake up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is off Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature LAN cable types A The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN Logging onto a LAN using the computer s default settings could cause a malfunction in LAN operation Check with your LAN administrator regarding set up procedures If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000 megabits per second 1000BASE T be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher You cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN 100 megabits per second 100BASE TX be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable You cannot use a CAT3 cable If you are using Ethernet LAN 10 megabits per second 10BASE T you can connect with either a CAT5 or a CATS User s Manual 4 33 Operating Basics Connecting LAN cable To connect the LAN cable follow the steps below IN E Conn
174. ets industry standards manufactured by TOSHIBA or other vendor can be installed The slot supports hot plug connection and utilizes the PCI Express interface that supports the reading and writing of data ata theoretical maximum rate of 2 5 Gbps Inserting an ExpressCard i Windows hot install feature lets you insert an ExpressCard while the computer s power is on E Do not insert an ExpressCard while the computer is in standby or Hibernation Mode Some cards might not work properly E The ExpressCard slot is the top slot of the two located on the left of the computer Please confirm this with the following illustration avoid confusion with the PC card slot and insert the card carefully To insert an ExpressCard follow the steps below 1 Insert an ExpressCard in the ExpressCard card slot User s Manual 9 3 Optional Devices 2 Press gently to ensure a firm connection ExpressCard slot ExpressCard Figure 9 3 Inserting the ExpressCard 3 After inserting the ExpressCard refer to the ExpressCard s documentation and check the configuration in Windows to make sure it is appropriate for your ExpressCard Removing an ExpressCard To remove the ExpressCard follow the steps below 1 Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 2 Point to ExpressCard and click 3 Press the ExpressCard eject button to extend it 1 If the ExpressCard is not inserted all the way the eject button may not pop
175. fications are made with this setting Built in HDD1 Status of the connected hard disk Built in HDD2 Status of the second hard disk Configuration status and settings JBOD No RAID settings Windows cannot be installed in this disk except for using recovery CD DVD 1RAID 0 Including RAID settings Windows can be installed in this disk 2RAID 0 Set to RAID 0 for 2 hard disks This cannot be set in this computer Current State Only RAID 1 Set to RAID 1 for 2 hard disks Current State Only UNKNOWN A RAID status except for the above status and settings Current State Only No Drive No hard disks connected Current State Only G 4 User s Manual TOSHIBA RAID it 3 The Execute Creation message is displayed once the configuration is modified Move the cursor to the appropriate location and press the space bar to continue Pressing the Home key will revert the modified Create State settings back to the Current State settings 4 The following message will be displayed Follow the instructions and press the keys in the order of 1 2 3 4 Enter D Warning If you change the RAID array you E will need to install the OS again Are you sure All data on the HDD s will be destroyed Do you really want to do this If Yes please type the key string which is written in the manual Ending the BIOS Setup Program Save the changes and end the program 1 Press the End key The Are you sure Y N The
176. floppy disk is in the floppy disk drive or a CD ROM is in the Optical Disk Drive Remove any floppy disk and or CD ROM and check the Boot priority Refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7 HW Setup There may be a problem with your operating system files Refer to your operating system documentation Your files may be fragmented Run Disk Defragmenter to check the condition of your files and disk Refer to your operating system s documentation or online HELP for information on running the Disk Defragmenter As a last resort reformat the hard disk Then reload the operating system and other files If problems persist contact your dealer For more information refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics Problem You cannot access a CD DVD in the drive Some CD DVDs run correctly but others do not Procedure Make sure the drive s disc tray is securely closed Press gently until it clicks into place Open the disc tray and make sure the CD DVD is properly seated It should lie flat with the label facing up A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser light from reading the CD DVD Make sure there is no obstruction Remove any foreign object Check whether the CD DVD is dirty If it is wipe it with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral cleaner Refer to the Media care section in Chapter 4 for details on cleaning The software or hardware configuration may be causing a problem Make sure the hard
177. fore processing the dial string Wait for quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If silence is not detected the modem sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller Hook flash Causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds and then return to off hook Return to command mode Causes the modem to return to command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call S n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the amp Zn X command See amp Zn X command for more information The range is 0 3 En Echo command This command controls whether or not the characters entered from your computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor echoed while the modem is in command mode EO Disables echo to the computer E1 Enables echo to the computer default C 2 User s Manual AT Commands Hn Ln Mn Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise Hook control This command instructs the modem to go on hook to disconnect a call or off hook to make the phone line busy HO Modem goes on hook default H1 Modem goes off hook Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise Request ID information This command displays product information about the modem 10 Returns modem identity string and driver version number 13 Same as l0 19 Returns region ID in English Result Codes OK n 0 3 9 ERROR Otherwise Monitor speaker volume This command sets speaker volume to low medium
178. fore going into standby hibernation Writing is completed if you can open the DVD ROM amp CD R RW or DVD Super Multi drive tray Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to vibration such as airplanes trains or cars Do not use an unstable surface such as a stand Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away from the computer Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media Do not use cut and paste The original data will be lost if there is a write error RecordNow Basic for TOSHIBA Note the following limitations when you use RecordNow DVD Video cannot be created using RecordNow DVD Audio cannot be created using RecordNow You cannot use RecordNow s Audio CD for Car or Home CD Player function to record music to the DVD R RW or DVD R RW discs User s Manual 4 17 Operating Basics Data Do not use the Exact Copy function of RecordNow to copy DVD Video and DVD ROM with copyright protection DVD RAM disc cannot be backed up with the Exact Copy function of RecordNow You cannot back up a CD ROM or CD R RW to DVD R RW or DVD R RW using the Exact Copy function of RecordNow You cannot back up DVD ROM DVD Video DVD R RW or DVD R RW to CD R RW using the Exact Copy function of RecordNow RecordNow cannot record in packet format You might not be able to use the Exact Copy function of RecordNow to ba
179. ge 1 255 Default 50 Units seconds User s Manual D 3 S registers S8 Comma pause time This register sets the time in seconds that the modem must pause when it encounters a comma in the dial command string In some countries regions S8 will set both wait before dialing and comma pause time Range 0 255 Default 2 Units seconds S11 DTMF dialing speed This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for each country region Range 50 255 Default 95 Units 001 seconds S12 Escape guard time This register sets the value in 20 millisecond increments for the required pause after the escape sequence Range 0 255 Default 50 Units 02 seconds S37 Dial line rate S37 0 default maximum modem speed 37 1 reserved 37 2 1200 75 bps 37 3 300 bps 37 4 reserved S37 5 1200 bps S37 6 2400 bps S37 7 4800 bps S37 8 7200 bps S37 9 9600 bps S37 10 12000 bps D 4 User s Manual S registers 37 11 37 12 S37 13 S37 14 37 15 S37 16 S37 17 S37 18 S37 19 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps User s Manual D 5 S registers AT command set result codes The following table shows the result codes The result code summary Result Code OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 1200 EC NO DIAL TONE BUSY NO ANSWER CONNECT 2400 EC CONNECT 4800 E
180. ge a battery pack when it becomes discharged Procedures To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working outlet The Battery indicator glows orange when the battery is being charged Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or the optional TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack Never attempt to charge the battery pack with any other charger Time The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a discharged battery Charging time hours Battery type Power on Power off Battery pack 4700mAh about 3 0 to 3 5 or longer about 3 0 High Capacity Battery Pack about 3 5 to 5 0 or longer about 3 0 7050mAh RTC battery 8 Doesn t charge The charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient temperature the temperature of the computer and how you use the computer If you make heavy use of external devices for example the battery might scarcely charge at all during operation Refer also to the section Maximizing battery operating time Battery charging notice The battery may not charge right away under the following conditions E The battery is extremely hot or cold If the battery is extremely hot it might not charge at all To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity charge the battery at room temperature of 10 to 30 C 50 to 88 F E The battery is nearly
181. gement H Menu Editing Maximum power savings Balanced Maximum performance Battery 9 Maximum power savings Balanced Maximum performance Figure B 1 Multiple Monitors and NVIDIA GeForce Go 7600 a The actual level may be different from the selected level in some circumstances B 10 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix C AT Commands In most cases you will not need to type AT commands manually However there might be some occasions when you will need to do so This chapter describes AT commands for data mode Fax and voice commands are taken care of by application software The format for entering AT commands is ATXn where X is the AT command and n is the specific value for that command After you type in the command press Enter Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or numeric values known as result codes All commands and commanda values accepted by the modem are described in this section any entry other than those listed results in an error Escape sequence The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter on line command mode While in on line command mode you can communicate directly to your modem using AT commands Once you finish you can return to data mode using the ATO command A pause the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time S12 must be completed after an escape sequence is entered This pause prevents the modem from interpreting t
182. ger that may have been provided with your PC or use Toshiba recommended alternate models to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the PC Use of an incompatible AC adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC possibly resulting in serious injury 2 16 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter provides basic information to get you started using your computer It covers the following topics E Setting up your work space for your health and safety Be sure also to read Instruction Manual for Safety amp Comfort This guide which is included with the computer explains product liability pmi o Connecting the AC adaptor Opening the display Turning on the power Starting up for the first time Turning off the power Restarting the computer Creating the Optical Recovery Discs of QosmioPlayer Restoring the preinstalled software All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time Setting up your work space Establishing a comfortable work site is important for you and your computer A poor work environment or stressful work habits can result in discomfort or serious injury from repetitive strain to your hands wrists or other joints Proper ambient conditions should also be maintained for the computer s operation This section discusses the following topics E General conditions Placement of the computer Seating and posture Lighting Wor
183. gh resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases Resolution LCD CRT Vertical colors colors frequency Hz 640 x 480 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 100 800 x 600 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 1024 x 768 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 1280 x 1024 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 1600 x 1200 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 100 1920 x 1200 16M 16M 16M 16M gt 85 1920 x 1440 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 Virtual 75 85 2048 x 1536 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 Virtual 2 75 1 The 1920 x 1200 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT JN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes B 8 User s Manual Display Controller and Modes Table 3 Video modes WUXGA continued Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases i Resolution LCD CRT Vertical colors colors frequency Hz 640 x 480 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 800 x 600 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 1024 x 768 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 1280 x 1024 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 100 1600 x 1200 16M 16M 16M 16M 60 75 85 100 1920 x 1200 16
184. hapter 7 HW Setup explains how to configure the computer using the HW Setup program Chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer This chapter explains how to use the Remote Controller on Windows XP Media Center Edition models as well as provides information about QosmioPlayer Chapter 9 Optional Devices describes the optional hardware available Chapter 10 Troubleshooting provides helpful information on how to perform some diagnostic tests and suggests courses of action if the computer doesn t seem to be working properly Chapter 11 Legal Footnotes provides Legal Footnotes information related to your computer The Appendixes provide technical information about your computer The Glossary defines general computer terminology and includes a list of acronyms used in the text The ndex quickly directs you to the information contained in this manual Conventions This manual uses the following formats to describe identify and highlight terms and operating procedures Abbreviations On first appearance and whenever necessary for clarity abbreviations are enclosed in parentheses following their definition For example Read Only Memory ROM Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary Icons Icons identify ports dials and other parts of your computer The indicator panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information on Keys The keyboard keys are used in th
185. he OK button 4 18 User s Manual Operating Basics DLA for TOSHIBA Note the following limitations when you use DLA E This software supports only rewritable discs DVD RW DVD RW and CD RW It does not support DVD R DVD R and CD R discs that are not rewritable E DLA does not support formatting a DVD RAM disc and writing to it this function is performed by DVD RAM Driver Software You may find that the DLA Format menu appears when inserting a DVD RAM disc although you should use the DVDForm utility to format this disc You can run DVDForm by clicking the Start button and then selecting All Programs DVD RAM DVD RAM Driver and DVDForm sequentially E Do not use any discs that have been formatted with packet writing software other than DLA Similarly do not use any discs that have been formatted with DLA with any packet writing software other than DLA When using a disc you are not familiar with format it by selecting Full Format before using it E Do not use the cut and paste function for files and folders A file or folder that has been cut may be lost if writing fails due to an error on the disc E When writing SETUP files for an application to a disc formatted by DLA and then attempting to start SETUP from this disc an error may occur In this case please copy the SETUP files to the hard disk and then run them from there Video As for InterVideo WinDVD Creator Platinum Only the mo
186. he Supervisor Password to start the computer even if the Unable to run HW Setup option has been configured The boot device selection methods described above will not change the boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup In addition if you press a key other than one of those listed or if the selected device is not installed the system will continue to boot according to the current and available settings in HW Setup HDD Priority Options This option lets you set the priority for HDD detection If the first detected HDD has a boot command the system will boot from the HDD Built in HDD1 gt The computer will look for the Built in HDD1 first Built in HDD2 next the Built in HDD2 Default Default Built in HDD2 gt The computer will look for the Built in HDD2 first Built in HDD1 next the Built in HDD1 7 4 User s Manual HW Setup Fi E f aboot command is not found on the first detected HDD the system J will not boot from the other HDD It will search the next device in the boot priority for a boot command E Although generally most models have two hard disks installed some models have only one hard disk In the case of models with one hard disk this setting item will not be displayed Network Boot Protocol This feature sets the protocol to remotely boot from the network J Network Boot Protocol is not displayed for Gigabit Ethernet LAN PXE Sets PXE as the protocol Default
187. he escape sequence as data The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using register S2 A Repeat last command This command repeats the last command string entered Do not precede this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing Enter A Answer command This command instructs the modem to go off hook and answer an incoming call User s Manual AT Commands Bn Communication standard setting This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell BO Selects CCITT V 22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps B1 Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps default B15 Selects V 21 when the modem is at 300 bps B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps default Result Codes OK n 0 1 15 16 ERROR Otherwise Dn Dial This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number Enter n the telephone number and any modifiers after the ATD command Any digit or symbol 0 9 A B C D may be dialed as touch tone digits Characters such as spaces hyphens and parentheses do not count They are ignored by the modem but you may want to include them to make the number and modifiers easier to read The following may be used as phone number modifiers P Pulse dialing T Touch tone dialing default j Pause during dialing Pause for time specified in Register S8 before processing the next character in the dial string Wait for dial tone Modem waits for a second dial tone be
188. he transmission speed of a printer CPU Central Processing Unit The portion of the computer that interprets and executes instructions CRT Cathode Ray Tube A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a fluorescent screen producing luminous spots An example is the television set cursor A small blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current position on the display screen D data Information that is factual measurable or statistical that a computer can process store or retrieve data bits A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits binary digits used to make up a byte If data bits 7 the computer can generate 128 unique characters If data bits 8 the computer can generate 256 unique characters DC Direct Current Electric current that flows in one direction This type of power is usually supplied by batteries User s Manual Glossary 5 Glossary default The parameter value automatically selected by the system when you or the program do not provide instructions Also called a preset value delete To remove data from a disk or other data storage device Synonymous with erase device driver A program that controls communication between a specific peripheral device and the computer The CONFIG SYS file contains device drivers that MS DOS loads when you turn the computer on dialog box A window that accepts user input to make system settings or record other information D
189. i0ce2e ebed dees idetndideddnwiabanay weet 3 5 Strategic Rest Breaks 0 00 cece ee eee 3 6 Other Things to Note 0 0 c eee eee 3 6 Connecting the AC adaptor 2 20 c eee eee eee eee 3 6 Opening the display 0c cece eee eee eee eee 3 9 Turning on the power 2 0c eee eee eee eee eee 3 9 Starting up for the first time 20 e eee 3 10 Turning off the power 2 0 cece eee eee 3 10 Shut Down mode Boot mode 0 00 cee eee ee eee 3 10 Standby Mode 5 0 2 os4 ener eee eee det eso Pee eee eee 3 11 Hibernation Mode 000 ccc eee ee 3 13 Restarting the computer 2 0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 3 14 Creating the Optical Recovery Discs of QosmioPlayer 3 15 Restoring the preinstalled software 2000000eeeeee 3 15 Operating Basics Using the Touch Pad 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 4 1 Pointing Mode Operation 00 c cece eee eee 4 1 Dual Mode Operation 00 0 cee eee eee 4 2 Synaptics Touch Pad Properties 00000e ee eeee 4 4 xviii User s Manual Table of Contents Using the Fingerprint Sensor 0 cece eee eee eens 4 5 Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor 4 6 How to Delete the Fingerprint Data 00085 4 7 Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility 4 8 Set Up Procedure 0 0c eee cette eee 4 8 Window Logon via Fingerprint Authent
190. ia Center to the main window Changes the TV channel or moves a page up and down depending on the available options Turns your computer sound off Allows you to start recording of TV programs The Recorded TV feature of Media Center Edition will be activated Opens the Television Program Guide to display available TV channels and programs to watch and record A shortcut to the full screen view It also takes you to the current point in a live TV program after pausing live TV Opens the main menu on a DVD movie if available 8 20 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Numbers Allows you to select a channel or chapter number while watching TV or CD DVD replay Numbers can be entered To select a channel or chapter number of two or more digits press the buttons sequentially For example press the 1 button and then the 0 button to select the number 10 Clear Deletes entered numbers Enter The OK button on the Remote Controller has the same functions User s Manual 8 21 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Remote Controller Power My TV My Music My Pictures My Videos STOP RECORD PAUSE PLAY gt REV lt lt FWD gt gt REPLAY Functions via the Remote Controller and the keyboard in the QosmioPlayer mode This list shows how the functions available from the keyboard correspond
191. ic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver E The brightness level is always set at the maximum value for about 18 seconds when the LCD turns on After 18 seconds the brightness level will return to the level set within the TOSHIBA Power Saver utility or you can change it manually E Display clarity increases with the brightness level d e Wireless setting If your computer has both Bluetooth and Wireless LAN functions you can press Fn F8 to select which type of wireless communication you want to use When you press these hot keys a dialog box will appear Continue holding down Fn and press F8 to change the setting If wireless communication is turned off Disabled Wireless Communication Switch will be displayed If no wireless communication device is installed no dialog box will appear Touch Pad Pressing Fn F9 in a windows environment enables or disables the Touch Pad function When you press these hot keys the current setting will change and be displayed as an icon User s Manual 5 5 The Keyboard Space LCD screen resolution selection Press Fn space keys to change the display resolution Each time when you press these hot keys the display resolution changes as follows The available resolution depends on the model With WXGA you can change the resolution between 800 x 600 and 1440 x 900 pixels With WUXGA between 800 x 600 and 1920 x 1200 pixels aga TOSHIBA Zooming Utility reduce To reduce
192. ication 4 9 Fingerprint Power on Security 00 00 e cee eee eee 4 9 Fingerprint Single Sign On Feature 0 00 eee eee 4 10 How to Swipe the Finger 0 00 0 c eee eee eee eee 4 11 Using Optical Disk Drives 0 0 eee eee eee 4 12 Loading GISCS eree wide uae got Ranken Rote Shh does bale ole eae ahs 4 12 Removing diSCS 6 2 0 eects 4 13 Writing CD DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive 4 14 Important message 0 cee tee 4 14 Legal Footnotes sw ecisuee ecieah reos neak pene pale Eaa EEG 4 14 Before writing or rewriting 0 0 eee eee eee eee 4 14 When writing or rewriting o e sasaaa auauna 4 17 RecordNow Basic for TOSHIBA 2 0 0 2 00 cee eee 4 17 Data Verification 0 0 cee eee 4 18 DLA for TOSHIBA 1 2 2 0 0c eect eee 4 19 VIEO e enana a waar eb E sone ahh A E E le pant dayne 4 19 When using WinDVD Creator Platinum 2 005 4 19 How to make a DVD Video 1 2 cee eee 4 20 How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator 4 20 Important information for US 6 ee ee 4 20 Media Care oiiciie a eae ae eee cen tu ee eed ae ee 4 22 CD DVDSs 2 2 ates ici tena standart cone a aeeua etiam at cate eee 4 22 Floppy GISKS acesi os ease ea eee eb eed te ed 4 22 TV TUNT eicieteeceakes aia eege eeree dee waa se eee are Seared a 4 23 Using the TV Tuner 2 020 e cee eee 4 23 Connecting the Cable 0
193. ications for Recordable Disc for Version 1 1 or version 1 2 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN LIMITED MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION DVD RW MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION RICOH Co Ltd DVD RAM DVD Super Multi drive only DVD Specifications for DVD RAM Disc for Version 2 0 Version 2 1 or Version 2 2 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Hitachi Maxell Ltd User s Manual 4 15 Operating Basics F E This drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than 8 speed l DVD R DVD R 4 speed DVD RW DVD RW 5 speed DVD RAM 2 4 speed DVD R DL 2 speed DVD R DL E Some types and formats of DVD R DL and DVD R DL discs may be unreadable E Ifthe disc is poor in quality dirty or damaged writing or rewriting errors may occur Be careful to check the disc for dirt or damage before you use it E The actual number of rewrites to CD RW DVD RW DVD RW or DVD RAM is affected by the quality of the disc and the way it is used E There are two types of DVD R discs authoring and general use discs Do not use authoring discs Only general use discs can be written to by a computer drive mM You can use DVD RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge and DVD RAM discs designed without a cartridge E Other DVD ROM drives for computers or other DVD players may not be able to read DVD R RW or DVD R RW discs E Data written to a CD R DVD R DVD R disc cannot be deleted either in whole or in part E Data deleted erased
194. ick Help on the Volume Control Microphone level The change the microphone gain follow the steps below 1 Click start point to All Programs point to Accessories point to Entertainment and click Volume Control Click Options and point to Properties Select Recording and click OK Click Options and select Advanced Controls Click Advanced Check the Microphone Boost checkbox OaRwWN SigmaTel Control Panel SigmaTel Control Panel lets you control some of the audio settings Follow the steps below to launch the SigmaTel Control Panel 1 Click start and click Control Panel 2 If you are viewing the Control Panel in Category View click on Switch to Classic View 3 Double click the SigmaTel Audio icon Volume control To adjust the audio volume in Windows for both playback and recording click the Levels tab To hear the voice from a microphone or the analog sound from the line input disable the Mute button in the Input Monitor and then disable the Audio power management function described below User s Manual 4 25 Operating Basics Audio power management The audio controller can be powered down when the audio function is not used To enable audio power management follow the steps below 1 Click the Advanced tab 2 Check the Enable Power Management check box 3 Input a time in Time to Power Saving State If the Enable Power Management check box is not checked the audio controller will a
195. igital Audio An audio compression standard that enables high quality transmission and real time playback of sound files disk drive The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and copies it to the computer s memory It also writes data from memory to the disk To accomplish these tasks the unit physically rotates the disk at high speed past a read write head disk storage Storing data on magnetic disk Data is arranged on concentric tracks much like a phonograph record display A CRT LCD or other image producing device used to view computer output documentation The set of manuals and or other instructions written for the users of a computer system or application Computer system documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information as well as system functions DOS Disk Operating System See operating system driver A software program generally part of the operating system that controls a specific piece of hardware frequently a peripheral device such as a printer or mouse DVB T Digital Video Broadcasting Terrestrial Also known as terrestrial digital TV Digital TV broadcasting standard DVD R R R A Digital Versatile Disc Recordable disk can be written once and read many times The DVD R drive uses a laser to read data from the disc DVD RAM A Digital Versatile Disc Random Access Memory is a high capacity high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of data The DVD RA
196. ign On feature Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module installed User s Manual 4 5 Operating Basics Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor Failure to follow these guidelines might result in 1 damage to the sensor or cause sensor failure 2 finger recognition problems or lower finger recognition success rate Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp objects Do not press the sensor strongly Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects Keep sensor surface dry and free of water vapor Do not touch the sensor with a soiled finger Minute foreign particles on a soiled or dirty finger may scratch the sensor Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any object with built up static electricity Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether for fingerprint enrollment registration or recognition Wash and dry your hands thoroughly Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal surface Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures especially when the weather is dry Clean the sensor with a lint free cloth Do not use detergent to clean the sensor Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the fingerprint recognition success rate
197. ing options from TOSHIBA dealer Memory expansion Battery Pack High Capacity Battery Pack Universal AC Adaptor USB FDD kit Battery Charger 100GB HDD upgrade kit Bluetooth USB Adaptor Bluetooth Wireless Mouse Bluetooth Wireless Stereo Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit A 256 512 1 024 or 2 048 MB memory module DDR2 533 667 MHz can easily be installed in the computer An additional battery pack can be purchased from your TOSHIBA dealer Use it as a spare or replacement An additional battery pack can be purchased from your TOSHIBA dealer Use it as a spare or replacement If you use your computer at more than one site frequently it may be convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor for each site so you will not have to carry the adaptor with you The USB floppy disk drive accommodates either 3 1 2 1 44 megabyte or 720 kilobyte floppy disks through connection to a USB port Please note that you cannot format 720 kilobyte floppy disks under Windows XP but you are able to use disks that have been previously formatted The battery charger lets you charge extra batteries outside the computer 100 GB Hard disk drive pack can easily be installed in the computer A Bluetooth adaptor that has a USB connector Wireless communications can be carried out with Bluetooth compatible equipment by connecting to the USB port of the computer You can buy the module from TOSHIBA dealer The Bluetooth Wi
198. ion LAN and Bluetooth functions Slide it to the right switch to turn on the functions All models are provided with a Wireless Communication switch although only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions E Turn WiFi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric device Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device operation possibly resulting in serious injury Follow the instruction of your medical device when using any WiFi or Bluetooth functionality Always turn off WiFi or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near automatic contro equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or fire detectors Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment possibly resulting in serious injury Do not use the WiFi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt WiFi or Bluetooth operation Pe Infrared receiver Infrared receiver window is provided with some IN Z window models This is a sensor window that receives signals from the remote control which is provided with your computer This supports only QosmioPlayer System indicators These LEDs let you monitor the status of various computer functions Details are given in the System indicators section 2 2 User s Manual The Grand
199. ipment by connecting to the USB port of the computer You can buy the module from TOSHIBA dealer User s Manual 9 27 Optional Devices Bluetooth Wireless Mouse The Bluetooth Wireless Mouse is a wireless optical mouse compatible with Bluetooth You can buy the Bluetooth Wireless Mouse from TOSHIBA dealer Bluetooth Wireless Stereo The Bluetooth Wireless Stereo is a wireless stereo headphone compatible with Bluetooth You can buy the Bluetooth Wireless Stereo from TOSHIBA dealer Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit The Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit is an internal computer module which supports both Bluetooth V2 0 and EDR You can buy the module from TOSHIBA dealer Security lock Security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy object to help prevent unauthorized removal of the computer Attach one end of a cable to a desk and the other end to the security lock slot on the right side of the computer 1 Turn the computer so the right side faces you 2 Align the holes for the security lock and attach the lock Security lock slot Figure 9 26 Security lock 9 28 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting TOSHIBA designed the computer for durability However should problems occur following the procedures in this chapter can help to determine the cause All readers should become familiar with this chapter Knowing what might go wrong can help prevent proble
200. its shielding A Class A device is sufficient for office use Class B provides a more stringent classification for home equipment use TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B computing device regulations Random Access Memory RAM High speed memory within the computer circuitry that can be read or written to restart Resetting a computer without turning it off also called warm boot or soft reset See also boot RGB Red green and blue A device that uses three input signals each activating an electron gun for a primary additive color red green and blue or port for using such a device See also CRT RJ11 A modular telephone jack RJ45 A modular LAN jack ROM Read Only Memory A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to contain information that controls the computer s basic operation You cannot access or change information stored in ROM S S Video Short for Super Video a type of connection used by S VHS videocassette players camcorders DVD players etc to transmit high quality video signals SCSI Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface for connection of a variety of peripheral devices SD card Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants SECAM L SECAM Sequential Color Memory is a broadcasting standard used in France serial communications A communications technique that use
201. k Performance and Maintenance and select the System icon Open System Properties window and click General tab Removing memory module To remove the memory module make sure the computer is in boot mode then 1 2 3 Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer s power off Make sure the Power indicator is off Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6 Power for details Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover The screw is attached to the cover to prevent it from being lost Slide your fingernail or a thin object under the cover and lift it off Push the latches to the outside to release the module A spring will force one end of the module up Grasp the module by the sides and pull it out If you use the computer for a long time the memory modules and the circuits located close to the memory modules will become hot In this case let them cool to room temperature before you replace them Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer Debris on the connectors may cause memory access problems Latches Slot A Slot B Figure 9 14 Removing the memory module User s Manual 9 15 Optional Devices 8 Seat the memory module cover and secure it with one screw 1 Be sure that the cover is closed firmly 9 Install the bat
202. k habits User s Manual Getting Started General conditions In general if you are comfortable so is your computer but read the following to make sure your work site provides a proper environment Select a work area that has E awell designed and functioning ventilation system that does not forcefully direct air on you E good air circulation E a comfortable ambient temperature and relative humidity Never place your PC where it will be exposed to excess heat such as in direct sunlight an unventilated vehicle or near a heater This may result in a system failure malfunction loss of data or damage to PC Never place your PC in a location where it will be exposed to extremely low temperatures This may result in a system failure malfunction or loss of data Never subject your PC to sudden temperature variations This may result in condensation causing a system failure malfunction or loss of data Do not expose your PC to dusty environments If dust gets inside the PC it could cause a system failure malfunction or loss of data If dust contaminates the PC do not turn on the power Take it to an authorized Toshiba service provider before you use it Never place your PC near an object that generates a magnetic field such as a speaker or TV Do not wear magnetic bracelets while using your PC Exposure to magnetic fields can cause system failure malfunction or loss of data Never place a heavy object on the PC
203. ked on the key kilobyte KB A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes See also byte and megabyte L level 2 cache See cache Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when a current is applied Liquid Crystal Display LCD Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets of glass coated with transparent conducting material The viewing side coating is etched into character forming segments with leads that extend to the edge of the glass Applying a voltage between the glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal LSI Large Scale Integration 1 A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100 000 simple logic gates on a single chip 2 An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration M main board See motherboard User s Manual Glossary 9 Glossary megabyte MB A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes See also kilobyte megahertz A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per second See also hertz menu A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen Also called a screen microprocessor A hardware component contained in a single integrated circuit that carries out instructions Also called the central processing unit CPU one of the main parts of the computer mode A method of operation for example the boot mode standby mode or the hibernation mode modem Derived from modulator demodulator a device that
204. l Music Initiative which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of digital music For this reason you cannot copy or playback protected material on another computer or other device You may not use the reproduction of any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment Formatting an SD card SD memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific standards If you format the SD card again be sure to format it with the TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility not with the format commands provided within Windows In order to run TOSHIBA SD memory card format click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Utilities and click SD memory card Format User s Manual 9 5 Optional Devices The TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility does not format the protected area of the SD memory card Should you need to format all areas of the memory card including the protected area you will need to obtain an appropriate application that applies the copy protection system Inserting an SD card To insert an SD card follow the steps below 1 Insert an SD card in the Bridge media slot 2 Press gently to ensure a firm connection SD card Bridge media slot Figure 9 5 Inserting an SD card E Make sure the SD card is oriented properly before you insert it E Do not turn the computer off or switch to Standby Mode or Hibernate Mode while files are being copied doing so m
205. l infrared Remote control receiver Please note that the infrared remote control for your set top box must be compatible in order to function Infrared transmitter cable Figure 8 6 Connecting the infrared transmitter cable 8 10 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer I This USB remote control only works with Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition and therefore cannot be used directly with QosmioPlayer Operational range of the remote control Point the remote control at your computer and press a button The operational angle and distance are described below Distance Within 5 m from the infrared receiver window Angle Within about 30 degrees horizontally and about 15 degrees vertically of perpendicular to the infrared receiver window 30degrees Infrared receiver window 30degrees 15degrees if vertically X 15degrees a vertically 5 Remote Controller Figure 8 7 Operational range of the remote control The appearance of the provided Remote Controller may vary from model to model and it is not provided with some models User s Manual 8 11 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Even if within the effective scope as described above the remote control may malfunction or not work correctly in the following cases E When an obstacle stands between the infrared receiver window of your computer and
206. le memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well amp V View profiles amp W Store current configuration Saves the current active configuration profile including S Registers The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated in the amp V command These settings are restored to the active configuration upon receiving a Zn command or at power up Refer to the amp V command amp W Stores the current configuration amp Zn x Store telephone number This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem s nonvolatile memory for later dialing The format for the command is amp Zn stored number where n is the location 0 3 to which the number should be written The dial string may contain up to 34 characters The ATDS n command dials using the string stored in location n Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 ERROR Otherwise Nn Error control mode selection This command determines the type of error control used by the modem when sending or receiving data NO Buffer mode No error control N1 Direct mode N2 MNP or disconnect mode The modem attempts to connect using MNP2 4 error control procedures If this fails the modem disconnects This is also Known as MNP reliable mode C 8 User s Manual AT Commands N3 V 42 MNP or buffered default The modem attempts to connect in V 42 error control mode If this fails it attempts to connect in
207. liance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate 2 The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment s Ringer Equivalence Number REN and an explanation notice similar to the following The Ringer Equivalence Number REN of the modem which can vary For the REN of your modem refer to your modem s label User s Manual User s Manual 1 The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the
208. ll be lost Benefits of Hibernation Mode The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits E Saves data to the hard disk when the computer automatically shuts down because of a low battery For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode this feature must be enabled in two places the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver If you do not configure this feature the computer will shut down in Standby Mode if battery power becomes depleted data saved in Standby Mode will be lost E You can return to your previous working environment immediately when you turn on the computer E Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System hibernate feature E You can use the panel power off feature Starting Hibernation Mode You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing Fn F4 Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard for details To enter Hibernation mode follow the steps below 1 Click start 2 Select Turn Off Computer 3 Open the Turn Off Computer dialog box 4 Select Hibernate User s Manual 3 13 Getting Started Automatic Hibernation The computer will enter Hibernate mode automatically when you press the power button or close the lid First however make the appropriate settings according to the steps below 1 Click start and open the Control Panel 2 Open Performance and Maint
209. ll the telephone company and let them know of this change viii User s Manual User s Manual Fax branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains ina margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual In order to program this information into your fax modem you should complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages Instructions for IC CS 03 certified equipment A 1 The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that comp
210. lways be in operation Graphic equalizer Adjust the equalizer settings to enhance sound quality Dolby Home Theater Adjust the Dolby Home Theater settings to enhance sound quality To enable the Dolby Home Theater check the Enable Dolby Home Theater check box Then you will use the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Virtual Speaker and Dolby Headphone To enable the Dolby Digital Live check the Enable Dolby Digital Live check box Dolby Home Theater and Dolby Digital Live are disabled as default For more information on using the Dolby refer to its help which is displayed on clicking the F1 key on the Dolby dialog Speaker configuration Selects your speaker configuration from the pull down menu in the Speakers tab Select Headphones when you use the Dolby Headphone Select Stereo when you use the Dolby Virtual Speaker Other items such as Quadraphonic 5 1 and 7 1 are not available 4 26 User s Manual Operating Basics Modem A This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem to and from a telephone jack E Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a PC system failure E Connect the built in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines E Never connect the built in modem to a digital line ISDN E Never connect the built in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange PBX E Ne
211. m power saving standby mode E Power on Security and Single Sign On feature This Windows program lets you define your own shortcut keys to quickly launch applications and speed your work in Windows To start the utility click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Utilities and click Fn esse The DVD Video Player is used to play DVD Video It has an on screen interface and functions Click start point to All Programs point to InterVideo WinDVD then click InterVideo WinDVD This utility lets you change image quality according to your viewing environment lets you select external input settings for Video TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities to allow easy control of communication devices and network connections TOSHIBA ConfigFree also allows you to find communication problems and create profiles for easy switching between locations and communication networks To start ConfigFree click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Networking and click ConfigFree TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that provides easy access to help and services This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the icon size on the desktop or the application window User s Manual Introduction RecordNow Basic for TOSHIBA DLA for TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Hotkey Utility for Display Devices TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba installed D
212. mory Stick Removing a Memory Stick To remove a Memory Stick follow the steps below 1 Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 2 Point to Memory Stick and click 3 Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly 4 Grasp the card and remove it Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove the Memory Stick or turn off the computer s power If you remove the Memory Stick or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the Memory Stick you may lose data or damage the card E Do not remove a Memory Stick while the computer is in Standby or Hibernation mode The computer could become unstable or data in the Memory Stick could be lost 9 8 User s Manual Optional Devices xD picture card A The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate xD picture cards with various memory capacities The xD picture card let you easily transfer data from devices such as digital cameras that use xD picture card flash memory Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury Inserting an xD picture card To insert an xD picture card follow the steps below 1 Insert the xD picture card into the Bridge media slot 2 Press gently to ensu
213. mpression V 42 V 42 error control only MNP 5 MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data compression MNP 4 MNP class 4 error control only NoEC No error control protocol 2 In some countries regions these result codes may not appear User s Manual D 7 S registers D 8 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix E v 90 The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V 90 technology The modem is capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps kilobits per second when connected to an Internet service provider that supports V 90 As with any modem the actual throughput speed of data transfer depends on analog telephone line conditions which can vary considerably Therefore many users will experience throughput in the range of 28 50kbps under normal telephone line conditions Upstream data flows at the V 34 rate V 90 rates can be achieved only when one V 90 capable host modem is connected to another The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select automatically V 34 if the remote modem lacks V 90 capability or if a combination of network and or phone line conditions prevent V 90 pmi o connection V 90 mode Function Transmission speed Data V 90 From 56kbps maximum to 28kbps minimum Reception only User s Manual V 90 No 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 Table E 1 Result codes for a V 90 conne
214. ms from occurring Problem solving process User s Manual Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following guidelines E Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists Further action may result in data loss or damage You may destroy valuable problem related information that can help solve the problem E Observe what is happening Write down what the system is doing and what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred If you have a printer attached print a copy of the screen using PrtSc The questions and procedures offered in this chapter are meant as a guide they are not definitive problem solving techniques Many problems can be solved simply but a few may require help from your dealer If you find you need to consult your dealer or others be prepared to describe the problem in as much detail as possible Troubleshooting Preliminary checklist Consider the simplest solution first The items in this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the computer This includes your printer and any other external device you are using Before you attach an external device turn the computer off When you turn the computer back on it recognizes the new device Make sure all options are set properly in the setup program Check all cables Are they correctly and firmly attached Loo
215. n T2 User s Manual HW Setup Boot Priority Boot Priority Options This option sets the priority for booting the computer Select from the following settings HDD here refers to the Built in HDD that is defined in the HDD Priority Option so that it should be recognized first HDD ROM FDD ROM HDD FDD gt FDD gt CD gt LAN gt HDD gt CD gt LAN gt CD ROM gt gt FDD gt CD ROM gt gt HDD CD ROM gt LAN gt HDD gt FDD CD ROM gt LAN gt FDD gt HDD The computer looks for bootable files in the following order HDD floppy disk drive CD ROM 2 and LAN Default The computer looks for bootable files in the following order floppy disk drive HDD CD ROM and LAN The computer looks for bootable files in the following order HDD CD ROM 2 LAN and floppy disk drive 1 The computer looks for bootable files in the following order floppy disk drive CD ROM LAN and HDD The computer looks for bootable files in the following order CD ROM 2 LAN HDD floppy disk drive The computer looks for bootable files in the following order CD ROM 2 LAN floppy disk drive t and HDD You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting U N 1 2 Cc Selects the USB floppy disk drive Selects the network Selects the primary HD
216. n 1 Press and hold down Fn 2 Check the keyboard indicators Pressing Fn turns on the most recently used overlay If the Numeric mode indicator lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry If the Arrow mode indicator lights you can use the overlay for cursor and page control 3 Release Fn to return to normal keyboard operation Temporarily changing modes If the computer is in Numeric mode you can switch temporarily to Arrow mode by pressing a shift key If the computer is in Arrow mode you can switch temporarily to Numeric mode by pressing a shift key Generating ASCII characters Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard operation But you can generate these characters using their ASCII codes With the overlay on 1 Hold down Alt 2 Using the overlay keys type the ASCII code 3 Release Alt and the ASCII character appears on the display screen With the overlay off 1 Hold down Alt Fn 2 Using the overlay keys type the ASCII code 3 Release Alt Fn and the ASCII character appears on the display screen 5 8 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Power Chapter 6 The computer s power resources include the AC adaptor and internal batteries This chapter gives details on making the most effective use of these resources including charging and changing batteries tips for saving battery power and power up modes Power conditions AC adaptor connected User s Manual
217. n allows you to play pause chapters or tracks STOP button Pressing this button to stop play in Media Center Previous button Pressing this button to move to the previous audio track DVD chapter or recorded data in Media Center Next button Pressing this button to move to the next audio track DVD chapter or recorded data in Media Center 8 2 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer DOLBY Record button Brightness down button Brightness up button DOLBY button TV out button Pressing this button when Windows starts to display Manual Recording while using Live TV in Media Center The button setting can be changed in TOSHIBA Controls properties To access the TOSHIBA Controls properties click start click the Control Panel click Printers and the Software and select the TOSHIBA Controls icon Pressing this button to decrease the brightness of the built in LCD The button setting can be changed in TOSHIBA Controls properties To access the TOSHIBA Controls properties click start click the Control Panel click Printers and the Software and select the TOSHIBA Controls icon Pressing this button to increase the brightness of the built in LCD The button setting can be changed in TOSHIBA Controls properties To access the TOSHIBA Controls properties click start click the Control Panel click Printers and the Software and select the TOSHIBA Controls icon Pre
218. n install additional memory in the computer s memory module slot to increase the amount of RAM This section describes how to install and remove a memory module T Place a mat beneath the computer to ensure that you do not scratch lid J when replacing the memory module you must ensure that this mat does not generate or hold a static electric charge E When you install or remove a memory module ensure that you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer JN E Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA E Donot try to install or remove a memory module under the following conditions as you can damage the computer and or the module and you risk losing data a The computer is turned on b The computer was shut down using either Standby Mode or Hibernation mode c Wake up on LAN is enabled E Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the computer It could cause malfunction or electric shock E Expansion memory is a precision electronic component that may be fatally damaged by static electricity Since the human body can carry Static electricity it is important that you discharge yourself before touching or installing any expansion memory modules To discharge your body s static electricity simply touch any metal close to you with bare hands 9 12 User s Manual Optional Devices If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer a beep will sound when you
219. n serious injury ExpressCard slot The ExpressCard slot can accommodate an EA ExpressCard ExpressCard eject This is a button for taking out ExpressCard from button ExpressCard slot User s Manual 2 3 The Grand Tour PC card slot i PC card eject button The PC card slot can accommodate a Type II card The slot supports 16 bit PC cards and CardBus PC cards This is a button for taking out PC card from a PC card slot Keep foreign objects out of the ExpressCard slot and PC card slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury i LINK IEEE1394 port Microphone jack Headphone S PDIF jack Headphone jack Connect an external device such as a digital video camera to this port for high speed data transfer A 3 5 mm mini microphone jack enables connection of a three conductor mini jack for monaural microphone input This jack lets you connect digital speakers or a stereo headphone 16 ohm minimum When you connect a digital speaker or headphones the internal speaker is automatically disabled This jack can be used also as S PDIF jack and enables connection of optical digital correspondence apparatus A 3 5 mm mini headphone jack enables connection of stereo headphones 2 4 User s Manual The Grand Tour Right
220. n the Arrow mode press Fn F10 The Arrow mode F10 indicator lights Now try cursor and page control using the keys shown in figure 5 2 Press Fn F10 again to turn off the overlay Numeric mode To turn on the Numeric mode press Fn F11 The Numeric mode F11 indicator lights Now try numeric data entry using the keys in figure 5 2 Press Fn F11 again to turn off the overlay amp 7 8 9 0 Home 7 YUe a W _Pulp a EE a TT A HA Esc F JE JF al JE z Ko S0 Pia Ed E JF ie eave al B B d TNT ole ae a ila Jan a la 1 We i Ty aj P aam I VIY TETTE Vy EEE aami S 1 i TH Figure 5 2 The numeric keypad overlay User s Manual of The Keyboard Temporarily using normal keyboard overlay on While using the overlay you can temporarily access the normal keyboard without turning off the overlay 1 Hold Fn and press any other key All keys will operate as if the overlay were off 2 Type upper case characters by holding Fn Shift and pressing a character key 3 Release Fn to continue using the overlay Temporarily using overlay overlay off While using the normal keyboard you can temporarily use the keypad overlay without turning it o
221. n with other keys to form soft keys Soft keys are key combinations that enable disable or configure specific features oT Some software may disable or interfere with soft key operations Soft key J settings are not restored by the Standby feature Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard EHHH UHA EA HENA ARRRRATZ TA E rrr LA ana Em TA aaja Cee J CEN CJA CA GU Tale Figure 5 1 A 101 key enhanced keyboard layout at Shenae The keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 101 key enhanced keyboard shown in figure 5 1 The 101 102 key enhanced keyboard has a numeric keypad and scroll lock key It also has additional Enter and Ctrl keys to the right of the main keyboard Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys some of the enhanced keyboard functions must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the larger keyboard Your software may require you to use keys that the keyboard does not have Pressing the Fn key and one of the following keys simulates the enhanced keyboard s functions 5 2 User s Manual The Keyboard Heo He Press Fn F10 or Fn F11 to access the integrated keypad When activated the keys with gray markings on the bottom edge become numeric keypad keys Fn F11 or cursor control keys Fn F10 Refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more information on how to operate these keys The power on default for both
222. nce is only optimized when operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when operating in battery power mode Wireless LAN 7 The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding electromagnetic environment obstacles access point design and configuration and client design and software hardware configurations 54Mbps is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802 11 a b g standard The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed Non applicable Icons s Certain notebook chassis are designed to accommodate all possible configurations for an entire product series Therefore please be aware that your selected model may not have all the features and specifications corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the notebook chassis User s Manual 11 3 Legal Footnotes Copy Protection Copy protection technology included in certain media may prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media TV Tuner to TV Tuner will function only in the country where the computer was purchased Images All images are simulated for purposes of illustration Qosmio Player 2 The Qosmio Player is not a Windows based application Battery life will be less than when using similar applications in the Windows Operating System LCD Brightness and Eye Stain 3 Your LCD display has a brightness a
223. ncluding an intelligent power supply and a Real Time Clock battery These resources are interrelated and any one could affect apparent power problems This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery If you cannot resolve a problem after following them the cause could lie with another power resource In such case contact your dealer Overheating power down If the computer s internal temperature becomes too high the computer will automatically shut down Problem Procedure Computer shuts down Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator and DC IN indicator stops blinking blinks orange It is recommended to leave the computer off until the its interior reaches room temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking 10 4 User s Manual Troubleshooting If the computer has reached room temperature and still does not start or if it starts but shuts down quickly contact your dealer Computer shuts down Indicates a problem with the heat dispersal and its DC IN indicator system Please contact your dealer is flashing in orange AC power If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected check the DC IN indicator Refer to Chapter 6 Power for more information Problem Procedure AC adaptor doesn t Check the connections Make sure the cord is power the computer firmly connected to the computer and a power DC IN indicator does outlet not glow blue Check the con
224. ndicator glows green when the alphabet keys are locked in uppercase The following indicators show the status of the display overlay Numeric Mode indicator Arrow Mode indicator i A Figure 2 9 Keypad overlay indicators User s Manual 2 13 The Grand Tour Arrow mode gt Numeric mode Optical Disk Drives e When the Arrow mode indicator lights green you can use the keypad overlay gray labeled keys as cursor keys Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5 The Keyboard You can use the keypad overlay gray labeled keys for numeric input when the Numeric mode indicator lights green Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5 The Keyboard One of the following Optical Disk Drives is installed in the computer DVD Super Multi drive An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD DVD ROM operation When the computer is accessing a CD DVD an indicator on the drive glows For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Operating Basics section in Chapter 4 Operating Basics Region codes for DVD drives and media DVD Super Multi drives and media are manufactured according to the specifications of six marketing regions When you purchase DVD Video media make sure it matches your drive otherwise it will not play properly Code 1 2 6 Writable discs Region Canada United States Japan Europe South Africa Middle East Southeast Asia East Asia Australia New
225. ned the ASCII standard and other information processing requirements antistatic A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity application A group of programs that together are used for a specific task such as accounting financial planning spreadsheets word processing and games ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII code is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used letters numbers and symbols async Short for asynchronous asynchronous Lacking regular time relationship As applied to computer communications asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted at regular time intervals B backup A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is destroyed batch file A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing a sequence of operating system commands or executable files binary The base two number system composed of zeros and ones off or on used by most digital computers The right most digit of a binary number has a value of 1 the next a value of 2 then 4 8 16 and so on For example the binary number 101 has a value of 5 See also ASCII BIOS Basic Input Output System The firmware that controls data flow within the computer See also firmware bit Derived from binary digit the basic unit of information used by the computer It is either zer
226. nergy Star compliance Before entering Standby mode be sure to save your data Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in Standby Mode The computer or the module could be damaged Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode unless the computer is connected to an AC power source Data in memory will be lost If you carry the computer on board an aircraft or into a hospital be sure to shut down the computer in hibernation mode or in shutdown mode to avoid radio signal interference Benefits of standby The standby feature provides the following benefits Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does hibernation Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System Standby feature You can use the panel power off feature User s Manual 3 11 Getting Started Executing standby You can also enable Standby by pressing Fn F3 Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard for details You can enter standby mode in one of three ways 1 2 Click start click Turn Off Computer and click Standby Close the display panel This feature must be enabled Refer to the Setup Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility described in the Control Panel Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power Saver Press the power button This feature must be enabled Refer to the Setup
227. ng the batteries 0 0 0 eee eee 6 8 Monitoring battery capacity 0 0 eee eee eee 6 10 Maximizing battery operating time 2 eee eee 6 10 Retaining data with power off 0 0 eee eee 6 11 Extending battery life 6 2 eee 6 11 Replacing the battery pack 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 6 12 TOSHIBA Password Utility 0 0 e eee eee eee 6 14 User password cs caccemu eect tte 6 14 Supervisor password s seses eect eee 6 15 Starting the computer by password 200eeeeeeeee 6 15 Power up modes 204 6s eek dee ee ee ee ee eee ee 6 16 Windows utilities 2 2 eee 6 16 HOt Keys nesr so eo Fe khan AE te eae OM abba phere ates 6 16 Panel power On Off cece eee eee 6 16 System Auto Off 2s sii ec eee eivede eee e ete teua aed a Ea 6 16 HW Setup Accessing HW Setup sieccceaccde teint Deny eaten d sles nae eee 7 1 HW Setup Window 2 20 cece eee eee eee ees 7 1 Other settings o tic de esha birt eo eed tases ways eae eee 7 8 Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program 7 8 Enhanced C States ci dsc sewed renee ee eae eee e pE beans 7 9 Core Multi Processing eee cence 7 9 Execute Disable Bit Capability 0 00 00 e eee eee 7 9 Virtualization Technology 0 0 cece eee 7 10 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Windows XP Media Center Edition 00 eee eee eee 8 1 Front operation
228. nor injury E Always turn off the power when you move the computer If the power button has a lock set it to the lock position Also be careful not to subject the computer to impact Failure to follow this instruction could result in damage to computer computer failure or loss of data E Never transport your computer with PC cards installed This could cause damage to your computer and or PC card resulting in product failure E Use the carrying case when transporting the computer E When carrying your computer be sure to hold it securely so that it does not fall or hit anything E Do not carry your computer by holding protruded portions User s Manual 4 35 Operating Basics 4 36 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 5 The Keyboard The computer s keyboard layouts are compatible with a 101 102 key enhanced keyboard By pressing some keys in combination all the 101 102 key keyboard functions can be executed on the computer The number of keys on your keyboard depends on which country region s keyboard layout your computer is configured with Keyboards for numerous languages are available There are five types of keys typewriter keys keypad overlay function keys soft keys and cursor control keys Typewriter keys The typewriter keys produce the upper and lower case letters numbers punctuation marks and special symbols that appear on the screen There are some differences however between using a
229. ny location from the sub menu E When you click a region it becomes the modem s region selection and the New Location for telephony will be set automatically Mm When you select a telephony location the corresponding region is automatically selected and it becomes the modem s current region setting User s Manual 4 27 Operating Basics Properties menu Click the icon with the secondary mouse button to display properties menu on the screen Setting You can enable or disable the following settings AutoRun Mode The Region Select utility starts automatically when you start up the operating system Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region The dialing properties dialog box will be displayed automatically after you select the region Location list for region selection A submenu appears displaying location information for telephony Open dialog box if the modem and Telephony Current Location region code do not match A warning dialog box is displayed if current settings for region code and telephony location are incorrect Modem Selection If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem a dialog box is displayed Select the COM port for your modem to use Dialing Properties Select this item to display the dialing properties JN If you are using the computer in Japan the Telecommunications Business Law requires that you select Japan region mode It is illegal to use the mo
230. o or one Eight bits is one byte See also byte board A circuit board An internal card containing electronic components called chips which perform a specific function or increase the capabilities of the system boot Short for bootstrap A program that starts or restarts the computer The program reads instructions from a storage device into the computer s memory bps Bits per second Typically used to describe the data transmission speed of a modem buffer The portion of the computer s memory where data is temporarily stored Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow from one device to another User s Manual Glossary 3 Glossary bus An interface for transmission of signals data or electric power byte The representation of a single character A sequence of eight bits treated as a single unit also the smallest addressable unit within the system cache memory High speed memory which stores data that increases processor speed and data transfer rate When the CPU reads data from main memory it stores a copy of this data in cache memory The next time the CPU needs that same data it looks for it in the cache memory rather than the main memory which saves time The computer has two cache levels Level one is incorporated into the processor and level two resides in external memory capacity The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage device such as a floppy disk or hard
231. o provided with the computer Refer to the Using the Remote Controller section in this chapter for detailed information and notes on how to connect remote control receiver Refer to the Using the Remote Controller section in this chapter for information on how to use the Remote Controller as well as how to install and remove its batteries User s Manual 8 5 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer My music My pictures Access indicator My TV My videos Stop Pause Record Play Fast Forward Rewind Skip More info Volume Volume Recorded TV DVD Menu Live TV Guide Numbers ENTER CLEAR TOSHIBA Figure 8 2 Remote Controller 8 6 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Power Access indicator My TV My music My pictures My videos Record Stop Pause Play REW Rewind FWD Fast Forward Starts or terminates the operating system This button functions like the Power button of your computer By default the Standby mode is equivalent to the Power Off state of your computer To change the setting click start select Control panel gt Performance and Maintenance gt TOSHIBA Power Saver gt Setup Action gt Manual Setup The following five options are available No action Ask me what to do Standby Hibernate and Shut down This indicator will glow while the
232. o release the battery oz latch pack for removal For detailed information on removing the battery packs refer to Chapter 6 Power Battery pack The battery pack powers the computer when the AC adaptor is not connected For detailed information on the battery pack refer to Chapter 6 Power Front with the display open This section shows the front of the computer with the display open Refer to the appropriate illustration for details To open the display push the display latch on the front of the display and lift up Position the display at a comfortable viewing angle LCD Sensor switch Not shown Display screen Display hinge Stereo speaker Right Display hinge Fingerprint Sensor Stereo speaker Left Power button Front operation button eleven buttons Touch Pad control buttons Figure 2 6 The front of the Touch Pad model with the display open User s Manual 2 9 The Grand Tour Display hinges Display screen harman kardon Stereo speakers The display hinges hold the display screen at easy to view angles The LCD screen displays high contrast text and graphics The available resolution depends on the model With WXGA you can change the resolution between 800 x 600 and 1440x 900 pixels With WUXGA between 800 x 600 and 1920 x 1200 pixels Refer to Display Controller and Modes in Appendix B When the computer operates on the AC adaptor the display screen s image will
233. of the fingerprint was not successful The fingerprint cannot be read due to injuries to the finger Procedure The system might be busy If the pointer is shaped as an hourglass wait for it to resume its normal shape and try again to move it Make sure the mouse is properly connected to the USB port Try changing the double click speed setting in the mouse control utility 1 Click start click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and select Mouse icon 2 Click the Buttons tab 3 Set the double click speed as required and click OK Try changing the speed setting in the mouse control utility 1 Click start click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and select Mouse icon 2 Click the Pointer Options tab 3 Set the speed as required and click OK The mouse might be dirty Refer to your mouse documentation for instructions on cleaning If problems persist contact your dealer Procedure Please try again using the correct posture Align your fingertip with the sensor as shown in the drawing and Swipe Refer to Using the Fingerprint Sensor in Chapter 4 Operating Basics Try the recognition process again using another enrolled finger Try the recognition process again using another enrolled finger If fingerprints from all the enrolled fingers cannot be read please logon by using the keyboard to input the password for the time being If problems persist contact your dealer
234. omputer Disk In Use This indicator lights when the floppy disk is being Indicator accessed 9 18 User s Manual Optional Devices Floppy disk slot Insert a floppy disk in this slot Eject button When a floppy disk is fully seated in the drive the eject button pops out To remove a floppy disk push in the eject button and the floppy disk pops out partially for removal JN Check the Disk In Use indicator when you use the floppy disk drive Do not press the eject button or turn off the computer while the light is glowing Doing so could destroy data and damage the floppy disk or the drive Fi E The external floppy disk drive should be placed on a flat horizontal surface when in use Do not set the drive on an incline greater than 20 while it is operating E Do not set anything on top of the floppy disk drive Using the USB floppy disk drive USB floppy disk drive connects to the computer s USB port It accommodates 1 44 megabyte or 720 kilobyte floppy disks Connecting USB floppy disk drive To connect the drive plug the floppy disk drive s USB connector into a computer s USB port Refer to Figure 9 19 JN Make sure the connector is right side up and properly aligned with the socket Do not try to force the connection doing so can damage the connecting pins USB port USB connector Figure 9 19 Connecting the USB floppy disk drive User s Manual 9 19 Optional Devices 7 If you connect the
235. on to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through IE Internet Explorer E Files and folders can be encrypted decrypted and third party access to them prevented E Disable the password protected screen saver when returning from power saving standby mode HM Power on Security and Single Sign On feature LCD Sensor switch This switch senses when the LCD panel is closed or opened and activates the Panel Power Off On feature When you close the panel the computer enters Hibernation mode and shuts down When you open the panel the computer starts in Hibernation mode Use the TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility to enable or disable this feature The default is enabled Refer to the TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility and Panel Power Off On items in Chapter 1 ntroduction for details on settings T Do not put a magnetic object close to the switch The computer will automatically enter Hibernation mode and shut down even if the Panel Power Off features is disabled Volume control Use this dial to adjust the volume of the stereo speakers or the stereo headphones Turn the dial clockwise to decrease the volume and turn it counter clockwise to increase the volume User s Manual 2 11 The Grand Tour System indicators LEDs beneath icons light when various computer operations are in progress n HDD Battery A N Power DC IN Wireless communication Bridge media slot Figure 2 7 System indicators adapto
236. onds Under any other conditions the indicator does not light The computer has three types of batteries E Battery pack E High Capacity Battery Pack Option E Real Time Clock RTC battery User s Manual 6 3 Power Battery pack When the AC adaptor is not connected the computer s main power source is a removable lithium ion battery pack also referred to in this manual as the battery You can purchase additional battery packs for extended use of the computer away from an AC power source Do not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected Before you remove the battery pack save your data and shut down the computer or set the computer to Hibernation Mode While entering Hibernation Mode the computer saves the contents of memory to the hard disk drive However for safety sake it is best to save your data manually E The battery pack is a lithium ion battery which can explode if not properly replaced used handled or disposed of Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations Use only batteries recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements E Always use the battery pack supplied as an accessory or an equivalent battery pack specified in the User s Manual Other battery packs have different voltage and terminal polarities Use of non conforming battery packs could generate smoke or cause fire or rupture possibly resulting in serious injury E Always dispose of used battery pack
237. onto the display or shine or reflect directly into the eyes of the user E Shield the PC from direct light by using tinted windows or by installing blinds or a screen E Use soft indirect lighting E Adjust the display panel to provide maximum visibility Work habits A key to avoiding discomfort or injury from repetitive strain is to vary your activities If possible schedule a variety of tasks into your workday If you must spend long periods at the computer finding ways to break up the routine can reduce stress and improve your efficiency E Sit in a relaxed posture Good positioning of your chair and equipment as described earlier can reduce tension in your shoulders or neck and ease back strain E Vary your posture frequently Occasionally stand up and stretch or exercise briefly E Exercise and stretch your wrists and hands a number of times during the day E Frequently look away from the computer and focus your eyes ona distant object for several seconds for example 30 seconds every 15 minutes E Take frequent short breaks instead of one or two long breaks for example two or three minutes every half hour E When you use a PC rest your eyes periodically and relax or stretch your muscles to avoid strain If you experience discomfort while operating the PC stop immediately and rest Continuous operation for long periods without adequate rest may cause pain in the arms wrists hands back neck or other parts of the
238. ool before moving it E Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat The material could be damaged Pressure or impact damage Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to strong impact Excessive pressure or impact can cause damage to computer components or otherwise cause malfunctions User s Manual General Precautions PC card overheating Some PC cards can become hot with prolonged use Overheating of a PC card can result in errors or instability in the PC card operation Also be careful when you remove a PC card that has been used for a long time Mobile phone Use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system Computer operation is not impaired but is recommended that a distance of 30 cm be maintained between the computer and a mobile phone in use The cautions on use of a Qosmio G30 series computer 1 Cleaning of dust accumulated on the cooling vent of the computer When you use your computer in a dusty area dirt and debris may accumulate on the cooling vents at the under side of your unit If this occurs the accumulated dust can cause insufficient heat dissipation which may result in the computer shutting down during use Carefully clean the dust from the vents using a vacuum cleaner 2 Cooling vents on the underside and back side of the computer Cooling vents n aes vents oy CURD 00 00 00 Cy ett TT 00 00 00 aren ia 00K w 00 w2 00 00 i A 00 00 i oS a 0
239. ore information on the Legal Footnote regarding Wireless LAN please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 7 Wireless This switch turns the Wireless LAN and communication Bluetooth functions on and off switch All models are provided with Wireless Communication switch Some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions Security Security lock slot Connects a security lock to anchor the computer to a desk or other large object Special features The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use Hot keys Key combinations let you quickly change the system configuration directly from the keyboard without running a system configuration program The Hot key functions are supported only under Windows not supported under QosmioPlayer Display automatic This feature automatically cuts off power to the power off internal display when there is no keyboard input for a time specified Power is restored when any key is pressed You can specify the time in the Monitor power off item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver HDD automatic This feature automatically cuts off power to the power off hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a time specified Power is restored when the hard disk is accessed You can specify the time in the HDD power offitem of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver
240. ormance for the greater demands of multimedia data transmission AN PC cards can sometimes become hot during PC operation Before you remove a PC card always wait for it to cool You could get burned removing a hot PC card Inserting a PC card Windows hot install feature lets you insert PC cards while the computer s power is on e Do not insert a PC card while the computer is in standby or hibernation D I mode Some cards might not work properly To insert a PC card follow the steps below 1 Insert a PC card in the PC card slot 2 Press gently to ensure a firm connection PC card PC card slot Figure 9 1 Inserting the PC card 3 After inserting the card refer to the PC card s documentation and check the configuration in Windows to make sure it is appropriate for your PC card 9 2 User s Manual Optional Devices Removing a PC card Il To remove the PC card follow the steps below 1 Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar 2 Point to PC card and click 3 Press the PC card eject button to extend it If the PC card is not inserted all the way the eject button may not pop out Be sure to push the PC card firmly and press the eject button again 4 Press the PC card eject button to pop the PC card out slightly 5 Grasp the PC card and draw it out Figure 9 2 Removing the PC card ExpressCard The computer is equipped with an ExpressCard slot Any ExpressCard that me
241. ot work They will function after you enter the password User s Manual 6 15 Power 2 Enter the password 3 Press Enter WN If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row the computer shuts off In this case you must turn the computer back on to retry password entry Power up modes The computer has the following power up modes E Boot Computer shuts down without saving data Always save your work before you turn the computer off in boot mode E Hibernation Data in memory is saved to the hard disk E Standby Data is maintained in the computer s main memory 7 Refer also to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the power I in Chapter 3 Getting Started Windows utilities You can configure various settings associated with both Standby Mode and Hibernation Mode within TOSHIBA Power Saver Hot keys You can use hot keys Fn F3 to enter Standby mode and Fn F4 to enter Hibernation Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard for details Panel power on off You can set up your computer so that power turns off automatically when you close the display panel When you open the panel power will be turned on in Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode but not in boot mode If the panel power off function is enabled and you use Shut down Windows do not close the LCD display panel until the shut down function is completed System Auto Off This feature turns the system off automatically if it i
242. ound 4 16 User s Manual Operating Basics Do not use hard disk utilities including those intended to enhance hard disk drive access speed They may cause unstable operation and data damage CD RW Ultra Speed media is not available If used data may be lost or damaged Write from the computer s hard disk drive to the CD DVD Do not try to write from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network device Writing with software other than RecordNow and InterVideo WinDVD Creator Platinum are not recommended When writing or rewriting Please observe consider the following when you write or rewrite to a CD R RW DVD R RW RAM or DVD R RW disc Do not perform any of the following actions when writing or rewriting E Change users in the Windows XP operating system MH Operate the computer for any other function including using a mouse or Touch Pad or closing opening the LCD panel E Start a communication application such as a modem E Apply impact or vibration to the computer E Install remove or connect external devices including the following PC card SD card ExpressCard Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro xD picture card MultiMediaCard USB devices external monitor i LINK devices optical digital devices E Use the Audio Video control button to reproduce music or voice Do not use shut down log off and standby hibernation while writing or rewriting Make sure writing or rewriting is completed be
243. oval of copyright owners you may be subject to claims for compensation for damage and or criminal penalties due to infringements of copyrights or personal rights Please remember to observe the copyright laws when you use this product to copy the copyrighted works or perform other actions Please note that you may infringe the owner s rights protected by the copyright laws if you use the screen mode switching functions e g Wide mode Wide Zoom mode etc of this product to display enlarged images video at coffee shops or hotels for the purposes of profits or providing these to the public Disclaimer This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy The instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA Qosmio G30 Portable Personal Computer at the time of this manual s production However succeeding computers and manuals are subject to change without notice TOSHIBA assumes no liability for damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors omissions or discrepancies between the computer and the manual ii User s Manual User s Manual Trademarks IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Intel Intel SoeedStep Intel Core Celeron and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries regions Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Micro
244. ows Logon Password before using the Fingerprint Power on Security and this Fingerprint Single Sign On Feature Please use TOSHIBA Password Utility to register your User BIOS Password If Windows Logon is not the default for your system see Manual to register your Windows Logon Password Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User BIOS Password and if selected HDD Password and Windows Logon Password 4 10 User s Manual Operating Basics How to Enable Fingerprint Single Sign On Feature It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL application prior to enabling and configuring the How to Enable Fingerprint Single Sign on Feature Check that the fingerprint is enrolled before configuring the settings See Manual for Fingerprint Registration Enrollment instructions 1 Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor 2 MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen Swipe your finger on the Fingerprint Sensor and select Control Center from the MENU items 3 The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed Click Settings and click System Settings 4 The Power on Security screen is displayed Place a checkmark in Allow power on security single sign on within Enable logon support and click OK Fingerprint utility limitations TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the Fingerprint utility technology will be completely secure or error free TOSHIBA does not gu
245. pace LCD screen resolution se lection 5 6 Fn esse 1 13 Front operation button 8 2 8 16 Function keys 5 2 G Graphics controller 1 6 H Hard disk drive 1 4 automatic power off 1 10 Installing 9 17 Removing 9 16 Heat dispersal 1 11 Hibernation 1 12 5 4 Hot keys 1 10 display brightness decrease 5 5 display brightness increase 5 5 display selection 5 4 instant security 5 4 power save mode 5 4 sound mute 5 3 Standby 5 4 wireless setting 5 5 HW Setup 1 12 accessing 7 1 Boot Priority 7 3 CPU 7 5 device config 7 6 display 7 2 general 7 1 keyboard 7 5 LAN 7 6 USB 7 7 window 7 1 l i LINK 1 7 2 4 9 26 connecting 9 27 disconnecting 9 27 precautions 9 26 problems 10 18 Indicator Arrow mode 2 14 Battery 2 12 6 2 Bridge media slot 2 12 Caps Lock 2 13 DC IN 2 12 6 3 HDD 2 12 Numeric mode 2 14 Power 2 12 6 3 Infrared receiver window 1 8 2 2 problems 10 11 K Keyboard 1 6 5 1 emulating keys on enhanced 5 2 F1 F12 function keys 5 2 Fn Sticky key 5 6 Hot keys 5 3 Typewriter keys 5 1 Windows special keys 5 6 Keypad overlay 1 11 5 7 arrow mode 5 7 numeric mode 5 7 Index 2 User s Manual Index temporarily using normal keyboard overlay on 5 8 temporarily using overlay overlay off 5 8 turning on the overlays 5 7 L LAN 1 8 4 33 active indicator 2 7 cable types 4 33 connecting 4 34 disconnecting 4 34 Link indicator 2 7 problems 10 16 M Media care 4 22 CD DVDs
246. playback time display mode Execute the selected music Increase the volume Decrease the volume Mute the volume Display the guide Menu cancel or back or return Change the status display mode Move the cursor Move the cursor Move the cursor Move the cursor Execute the selected option Increase the volume Decrease the volume Mute the volume Display the guide User s Manual 8 23 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer LIVE TV DVD MENU DVD MENU 2 1 3 1 4 1 5r 6 1 7 8 1 9 1 o CLEAR ENTER F10 F8 F11 Ctrl T Start QosmioPlayer TV Terminate QosmioPlayer TV gt Start QosmioPlayer CD QosmioPlayer DVD Select channel 1 Select channel 2 Select channel 3 Select channel 4 Select channel 5 Select channel 6 Select channel 7 Select channel 8 Select channel 9 Normally functions as 0 Start Stop Time Shifting functions Terminate QosmioPlayer CD gt Start QosmioPlayer TV Start QosmioPlayer CD Select track 1 Select track 2 Select track 3 Select track 4 Select track 5 Select track 6 Select track 7 Select track 8 Select track 9 Normally functions as 0 Terminate QosmioPlayer DVD gt Start QosmioPlayer TV Displays the top menu Start QosmioPlayer DVD Select chapter 1 Select chapter 2 Select chapter 3 Select chapter 4 Select cha
247. possibly resulting in death or serious injury 8 Never store a battery pack in an area of high humidity This could cause a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury 6 6 User s Manual Power 9 Never expose a battery pack to abnormal shock vibration or pressure The battery pack s internal protective device could fail causing it to overheat or ignite resulting in caustic liquid leakage or explosion or fire possibly resulting in death or serious injury 10 Never subject a battery pack to heat and never store it or use it near a heat source The battery pack could ignite or explode when heated or burned possibly resulting in death or serious injury Subjecting a battery pack to heat could also cause caustic liquid to leak It can also cause failure malfunction or loss of stored data 11 Always use the battery pack supplied as an accessory or an equivalent battery pack specified in the User s Manual Other battery packs have different voltage and terminal polarities Use of non conforming battery packs could generate smoke or cause fire or rupture possibly resulting in serious injury 12 Never allow caustic electrolyte fluid leaked from the battery pack to contact your eyes body or clothing If caustic electrolyte fluid from the battery pack should contact your eyes immediately wash your eyes with large amounts of running water and obtain prompt medical attention to help prevent permanent eye damage If ele
248. pproaching that of a TV device We recommend that you adjust the brightness of your LCD to a comfortable level to prevent possible strain on your eyes Safety Use for TV Tuner 14 If you have to operate your PC during a thunderstorm and are connecting the TV tuner to an outside antenna you should operate your PC using AC power mode The AC adapter offers some protection against but does not entirely prevent possible electric shock caused by lightning For complete protection do not operate your PC during a thunderstorm 11 4 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Appendix A Specifications This appendix summarizes the computer s technical specifications Physical Dimensions Weight maximum 4 8 kilograms configured with 17 WUXGA 2GB x 2 120GB HDD x2 DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer modem LAN 100M Bit Wireless LAN Bluetooth TV tuner Weight will vary with other configurations Above weights are measured at specific criteria They are not guaranteed as the maximum weight of the actual product Size 406 w x 295 d x 45 5 53 5 h millimeters not including parts that extend beyond the main body Environmental Requirements Conditions Ambient temperature Relative humidity Operating 5 C 41 F to 35 C 95 F 20 to 80 Non operating 20 C 4 F to 65 C 149 F 10 to 90 Thermal Gradient 15 C per hour maximum operating Thermal Gradient 20 C per hour maximum non operating Wet bulb 26 C m
249. pter 5 Select chapter 6 Select chapter 7 Select chapter 8 Select chapter 9 Normally functions as 0 8 24 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Fn F7 Fn F6 Ctrl K Ctrl L gt 00 Y E Ctrl R Ctrl S V DEL F9 f w LCD Brightness up Switch TV Line LCD Brightness Down Display Do Not Display Settings Menu Go back 10 seconds Skip after 30 seconds Change the Audio Multiplex Slow Play Remove Disk Display Version Settings Menu only Delete Title Library only Adjust the screen size LCD Brightness up LCD Brightness Down Remove Disk One Song Repeat Disk Repeat Suffle Repeat Display Version Settings Menu only LCD Brightness up LCD Brightness Down Display Do Not Display Settings Menu Go back 10 seconds Skip after 30 seconds Select title Angle Subtitle Language Change Slow Play Remove Disk Display Version Settings Menu only Display Menu 1 When entering more than 2 digits press the buttons without pausing User s Manual 8 25 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer List of language codes When inputting the QosmioPlayer language codes refer to the list shown below Code English Name of Code English Name of Language Language AA Afar EL Modern Greek AB Abkhazian EN English AF Afrikaans EO Esperan
250. r Figure 8 16 Operational range of the remote control F Even if within the effective scope as described above the remote control 1 may malfunction or not work correctly in the following cases E When an obstacle stands between the infrared receiver window of your computer and the Remote Controller E When direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light strikes the infrared receiver window E When the infrared receiver window or the infrared emission part of the Remote Controller is dirty E When other computers which use an infrared remote controller are used near to your computer E When a low battery condition is present User s Manual 8 29 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Installing Removing batteries Be sure to install the dry batteries provided with this product before using the Remote Controller The procedures for installing and removing the batteries vary depending on the type of the Remote Controller Check the type and then install or remove the batteries as instructed Store the battery for the remote contro beyond the reach of children If a child swallows a battery this might result in choking If it happens contact a doctor immediately JN Observe the following precautions when using the battery of the Remote Controller E Do not use batteries other than those specified E Ensure that you insert the batteries with their polarities correctly aligned
251. r s output voltage is abnormal or if the power supply malfunctions this indicator flashes orange Power The Power indicator glows blue when the computer is on If you select Standby from Shut Down Windows this indicator flashes orange one second on two seconds off while the computer shuts down DC IN The DC IN indicator glows blue when DC power La is supplied from the AC power adaptor If the Battery The Battery indicator shows the condition of the battery s charge blue indicates full charge orange indicates battery charging and flashing orange indicates a low battery charge Refer to Chapter 6 Power computer is accessing the built in hard disk drive Bridge media slot The Bridge media slot indicator glows blue when the computer is accessing the Bridge media slot Ss HDD The HDD indicator glows blue when the 2 12 User s Manual The Grand Tour communication when the Bluetooth and wireless LAN functions are turned on All models are provided with a Wireless Communication switch although only some models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions yp Wireless The Wireless communication indicator glows Keyboard indicators The figures below show the positions of the keypad overlay indicators and the Caps Lock indicator The following indicator shows the state of an alphabet key pressed or released indicator AN Figure 2 8 Caps Lock indicator Caps Lock The Caps Lock i
252. r the computer automatically recognizes the monitor and determines whether it is color or monochrome To change the display settings press Fn F5 If you disconnect the monitor before you turn the computer off be sure to press Fn F5 to switch to the internal display Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard for details on using hot keys to change the display setting TV The S Video data on your computer can be viewed on a TV set To do so connect your computer s S Video out port to the TV using the S Video out cable You can use the hotkeys Fn F5 to change the display device Refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard Installation Connection via the S Video out port 1 Plug one end of the S Video out cable into the S Video out port of your computer S Video out port Figure 9 21 Connecting the S Video out port 1 The computer is equipped with either an HDMI or D Video out port 2 Insert the other end of the S Video out cable into the S1 S2 video input of the TV set You can then either use the computer s speakers or a set of headphones connected to the headphone jack to get sound User s Manual 9 21 Optional Devices Connection via the D Video out port 1 Plug one end of the D Video out cable into the D Video out port of your computer D Video out port Figure 9 22 Connecting the D Video out port 2 Insert the other end of the D Video out cable into the video input terminal of the TV set Use your computer
253. r one DVD chapter Displays the previous window The button provides more details on a TV program than is listed in the Guide Moves the cursor to navigate within Media Center windows Selects the desired action or window option It acts like the Enter Key If watching TV in full screen mode pressing OK switches back to the previous viewed channel Press again to toggle back It acts the same way as a Jump button on some TV remote controls Increases the volume while watching TV viewing DVD s or replaying CD s Decreases the volume while watching TV viewing DVD s or replaying CD s Opens Media Center to the main window Changes the TV channel or moves a page up and down depending on the available options Turns your computer sound off Allows you to start recording of TV programs The Recorded TV feature of Media Center Edition will be activated Opens the Television Program Guide to display available TV channels and programs to watch and record A shortcut to the full screen view It also takes you to the current point in a live TV program after pausing live TV Opens the main menu on a DVD movie if available 8 8 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Numbers Allows you to select a channel or chapter number while watching TV or CD DVD replay Numbers can be entered To select a channel or chapter number of two or more digits press the button
254. r to Chapter 6 the TOSHIBA Password Utility for details about the user password The Check system Then press F1 key message is displayed Press the F1 key The BIOS setup program will start up Ending the BIOS Setup Program Save the changes and end the program 1 Press the End Key The Are you sure Y N The changes you made will cause the system to reboot message is displayed Press the Y key The configured settings are saved and the BIOS setup program ends The computer may reboot depending on the settings that were modified Ending the BIOS Setup Program Halfway The configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of the changes made 1 2 Press the Esc key The Exit without saving Y N message is displayed Press the Y key The BIOS setup program will end 7 8 User s Manual HW Setup Enhanced C States This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C States The configuration for the Enhanced C States is carried out in the BIOS setup program This setting is displayed on the first page of the setup screen Enabled This lowers the power consumption Default Disabled This does not lower the power consumption Core Multi Processing The Core Multi Processing sets the CPU operating mode The configuration for the Core Multi Processing is carried out in the BIOS setup program This setting is displayed on the first page of the setup scr
255. rder JPEG functions DVD Audio mini DVD and Video CD functions are not supported in this version 4 20 User s Manual Operating Basics 3 4 While recording video to DVD or tape please close all other programs Do not run software like a screen saver because it can put a heavy load on the CPU Do not run communication applications like a modem or a LAN Before recording the video to DVD When you record to DVD discs please use only media recommended by TOSHIBA Do not set the working drive to a slow device like a USB 1 1 hard disk drive or it will fail to write DVD Do not perform any of the following actions Operate the computer for any other function including using a mouse or TouchPad or closing opening the LCD panel Bump or cause vibration to the computer Use the Mode control button and Audio Video control button to reproduce music or voice Install remove or connect external devices including the following PC card SD card ExpressCard Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro xD picture card MultiMediaCard USB devices external monitor i LINK devices optical digital devices Please verify your disc after recording important data DVD R R RW disc cannot be written in VR format WinDVD Creator cannot export to DVD Audio VideoCD miniDVD format WinDVD Creator can write DVD RAM RW in VR format but the disc may only play on your computer When writing to DVD disc WinDVD Creator requires 2
256. re a firm connection xD picture card Bridge media slot Figure 9 8 Inserting an xD picture card Removing an xD picture card To remove an xD picture card follow the steps below Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar Point to xD picture card and click Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly Grasp the card and remove it HE ASNS Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove the xD picture card or turn off the computer s power If you remove the xD picture card or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the xD picture card you may lose data or damage the card E Do not remove an xD picture card while the computer is in Standby or Hibernation mode The computer could become unstable or data in the XD picture card could be lost User s Manual 9 9 Optional Devices Memory card care E Memory cards are consumable items so make sure you back up important data E Do not twist or bend memory cards E Do not expose memory cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media close to containers of liquid E Do not touch the metal part of a memory card or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty E After using memory card return it to its case 1 For more details on using memory cards see manuals accompanying the cards MultiMediaCard The computer is equipped with the Bridge media slot that can accommodate MultiMediaCard flash memory
257. reless Mouse is a wireless optical mouse compatible with Bluetooth You can buy the Bluetooth Wireless Mouse from TOSHIBA dealer The Bluetooth Wireless Stereo is a wireless stereo headphone compatible with Bluetooth You can buy the Bluetooth Wireless Stereo from TOSHIBA dealer The Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit is an internal computer module which supports both Bluetooth V2 0 and EDR You can buy the module from TOSHIBA dealer User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 2 The Grand Tour This chapter identifies the various components of your computer Become familiar with each component before you operate the computer Legal Footnote Non applicable Icons 8 For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Non applicable Icons please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 Click the 8 Front with the display closed Figure 2 1 shows the computer s front with its display panel in the closed position Infrared receiver window Display latch System indicators Optical Disk Drive Wireless communication switch Figure 2 1 Front of the computer with display closed Optical Disk Drive The computer is configured with a DVD Super Multi drive User s Manual The Grand Tour Display latch This latch secures the LCD panel in its closed position Push the latch to open the display Wireless Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless y Off On communicat
258. removable disk usually referred to as drive C The factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it for servicing Also called fixed disk hard disk drive HDD An electromechanical device that reads and writes a hard disk See also hard disk hardware The physical electronic and mechanical components of a computer system typically the computer itself external disk drives etc See also software and firmware hertz A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second hexadecimal The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A B C D E and F host computer The computer that controls regulates and transmits information to a device or another computer hot key The computer s feature in which certain keys in combination with the extended function key Fn can be used to set system parameters such as speaker volume HW Setup A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various hardware components icon A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator panel In Windows an icon represents an object that the user can manipulate i LINK IEEE1394 This port enables high speed data transfer directly from external devices such as digital video cameras input The data or instructions you provide to a computer communication device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or internal storage devices The data sent or ou
259. reting programs creating data files and controlling the transmission and receipt input output of data to and from memory and peripheral devices Glossary 10 User s Manual Glossary output The results of a computer operation Output commonly indicates data 1 printed on paper 2 displayed at a terminal 3 sent through the serial port of internal modem or 4 stored on some magnetic media p PAL PAL Phase Alternating Line is the dominant video and broadcasting standard in Europe parity 1 The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values integers both of which are either on or off odd or even 0 or 1 2 In serial communications an error detection bit that is added to a group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd Parity can be set to none odd or even password A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user The computer provides various levels of password protection such as user and supervisor pel The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels See pixel peripheral component interconnect An industry standard 32 bit bus peripheral device An I O device that is external to the central processor and or main memory such as a printer or a mouse P ritel P ritel is a 21 pin connecting cable port system that allows images and high quality stereo sound including Dolby Pro Logic sound formats to
260. rint data is still displayed on the list Select all fingerprint data and click remove 6 Check whether all fingerprint data was deleted on the fingerprint Storage inspector screen Fingerprint Sensor Limitations E The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique characteristics in a fingerprint E A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or recognition is not successful within a fixed duration E The recognition success rate may differ from user to user E Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology will be error free E Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility The following illustrations show the correct way to slide your finger over the recognition sensor af op Tai 0 Ld Align your fingertip with the sensor as shown in the drawing and Swipe User s Manual 4 7 Operating Basics Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility Backups for saved fingerprint data and saved information in the PasswordBank can be performed in Import or Export User Data under Fingerprint Software Management However encrypted files cannot be backuped within Mysafe with this function Recommended is backing up encrypted files to extern
261. rom the calculated time E With repeated discharges and recharges the battery s capacity will gradually decrease Therefore an often used older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged In this case TOSHIBA Power Saver will indicate a 100 charge for both the old and new battery but the displayed estimated time remaining will be shorter for the older battery Maximizing battery operating time A battery s usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a single charge How long the charge lasts in a battery depends on E How you configure the computer for example whether you enable battery power saving options The computer provides a battery save mode which can be set in TOSHIBA Power Saver to conserve battery power This mode has the following options HM CPU Processing speed E Screen brightness E Cooling Method 6 10 User s Manual Power E System standby E System Hibernation E Monitor Power off E HDD Power off E How often and how long you use the hard disk optical disc and the floppy disk drive E How much charge the battery contained to begin with How you use optional devices such as a PC card to which the battery supplies power Enabling Standby mode conserves battery power if you are frequently turning the computer off and on Where you store your programs and data Closing the display when you are not using the keyboard saves power
262. rtical colors colors frequency Hz 640 x 480 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 800 x 600 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 1024 x 768 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 1280 x 1024 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 Virtual 75 1400 x 900 64K 64K 64K 64K 65 1600 x 1200 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 Virtual 75 1920 x 1440 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 Virtual 75 2048 x 1536 64K 64K 64K 64K 60 Virtual 75 1 The 1440 x 900 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT rN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes User s Manual B 5 Display Controller and Modes Ds Resolution 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 Virtual 1400 x 900 1600 x 1200 Virtual 1920 x 1440 Virtual 2 2048 x 1536 Virtual 1 The 1440 x 900 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD Table 3 Video modes WXGA continued Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases LCD colors 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD CRT colors 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M
263. s Also if your software supports both graphics and text modes the screen display may appear to operate faster using a text mode User s Manual Display Controller and Modes Video mode 0 1 2 3 0 1 2t 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 Type VGA Text VGA Text VGA Text VGA Text VGA Text VGA Text VGA Grph VGA Grph VGA Text VGA Text Resolution 40 x 25 Characters 80 x 25 Characters 40 x 25 Characters 80 x 25 Characters 40 x 25 Characters 80 x 25 Characters 320 x 200 Pels 640 x 200 Pels 80 x 25 Characters 80 x 25 Characters Character matrix pels 8x8 8x8 8x14 8x14 9x 16 9x 16 9x14 9x 16 Table1 Video modes VGA Colors 16 of 256K 16 of 256K 16 of 256K 16 of 256K 16 of 256K 16 of 256K 4 of 256K 2 of 256K Mono Mono Scanning frequency Vertical Hz 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 B 2 User s Manual Display Controller and Modes Table1 Video modes VGA continued Video Type Resolution Character Colors Scanning mode matrix frequency pels Vertical Hz D VGA 320 x 200 8x8 16 of 256K 70 Grph Pels E VGA 640 x 200 8x8 16 of 256K 70 Grph Pels F VGA 640 x 350 8x 14 Mono 70 Grph Pels 10 VGA 640 x 350 8x14 16 of 256K 70 Grph Pels 11 VGA 640 x 480 8 x 16 2 of 256K 60 Grph Pels 12 VGA 640 x 480 8 x 16 16 of 256K 60 Grph Pels 13 VGA 320 x 200 8
264. s the Bluetooth Card from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized In normal operating configuration the LCD in the upright position the distance between the antenna and the user should not be less than 20cm This device and its antenna s must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s website www hc sc gc ca rpb Taiwan Article 14 Unless approved for any model accredited low power radio frequency electric machinery any company trader or user shall not change the frequency increase the power or change the features and functions of the original design Article 17 Any use of low power radio frequency electric machinery shall not affect the aviation safety and interfere with legal communications In event that any interference is found the use of such electric machinery shall be stopped immediately and reusing of such products can be resumed until no interference occurs after improvement The legal communications mentioned in the above item refer to radio communications operated in accordance with telecommunication laws and regulations Low power radio frequency electric machinery
265. s as few as two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another serial interface Refer to a type of information exchange that transmits information sequentially one bit at a time SIO Serial Input Output The electronic methodology used in serial data transmission soft key Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard change some configuration options stop program execution and access the numeric keypad overlay Glossary 12 User s Manual Glossary software The set of programs procedures and related documentation associated with a computer system Specifically refers to computer programs that direct and control the computer system s activities See also hardware stop bit One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or group codes in asynchronous serial communications subpixel Three elements one red one green and blue RGB that make up a pixel on the color LCD The computer sets subpixels independently each may emit a different degree of brightness See also pixel synchronous Having a constant time interval between successive bits characters or events system disk A disk that has been formatted with an operating system For MS DOS the operating system is contained in two hidden files and the COMMAND COM file You can boot a computer using a system disk Also called an operating system disk T terminal A typewriter like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to
266. s in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations Put insulating tape such as cellophane tape on the electrode during transportation to avoid a possible short circuit fire or electric shock Failure to do so could possibly result in serious injury E Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode Data is stored in RAM so if the computer loses power it will be lost When the computer is powered off in Standby Mode and the AC adaptor is not connected the battery pack supplies power to maintain data and programs in memory If the battery pack is completely discharged Standby Mode cannot function and the computer loses all information in memory To ensure that the battery pack maintains its maximum capacity operate the computer on battery power at least once a month until the battery pack is fully discharged Refer to Extending battery life in this chapter for procedures If the computer is continuously operated on AC power through an AC adaptor for an extended period more than a month the battery may fail to retain a charge It may not function efficiently over the expected life of the battery and the Battery indicator may not indicate a low battery condition 6 4 User s Manual Power High Capacity Battery Pack Option ZN A High Capacity Battery Pack is installable instead of a main battery pack The connection method of High Capacity Battery Pack is the same as that of main battery pack
267. s not used for a set duration The system shuts down in Standby mode or Hibernation mode in Windows 6 16 User s Manual Qosmio G30 Chapter 7 HW Setup This chapter explains how to use TOSHIBA HW Setup program to configure your computer and other setting Accessing HW Setup To run HW Setup click start click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and select TOSHIBA HW Setup HW Setup window The HW Setup window contains the following tabs General Display Boot Priority Keyboard CPU LAN Device Config and USB There are also three buttons OK Cancel and Apply OK Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup window Cancel Closes the window without accepting your changes Apply Accepts all your changes without closing the HW Setup window General This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons Default and About Default Return all HW Setup values to the factory settings About Display the HW Setup version Setup This field displays BIOS Version and date User s Manual HW Setup Display This tab lets you customize your computer s display settings for either the internal LCD screen or for an external monitor Power On Display Lets you select the display to be used when the computer is booted this setting is only available with standard VGA modes and cannot be configured through the Windows Desktop properties Auto Selected Selects an external monitor
268. s product complies with any mandatory product specification in any country region where the product is sold In addition the product complies with the following European Union EU and EFTA This equipment complies with the R amp TTE directive 1999 5 EC and has been provided with the CE mark accordingly Canada Industry Canada IC This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device User s Manual H 3 Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability L utilisation de ce dispositif est autoris e seulement aux conditions suivantes 1 il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et 2 l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre pr t a accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique re u m me si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif The term IC before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met USA Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment
269. s sequentially For example press the 1 button and then the 0 button to select the number 10 Clear Deletes entered numbers Enter The OK button on the Remote Controller has the same functions Using the Remote Controller This computer includes a remote control unit which allows you to control some of your computer s functions from a distant location 1 E The Remote Controller is designed specifically for this computer E Some application programs may not support remote control functions Connecting the Remote control receiver An infrared receiver which connects to one of the computer s USB ports allows you to Microsoft Windows XP Media Center Edition from distant location Infrared transmitter cable port Access indicator Infrared receiver window USB port Figure 8 3 The Remote control receiver The Access indicator turns on when signals are received from the controller User s Manual 8 9 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer 1 Connect a provided USB cable to the USB port of the Remote control receiver USB cable Figure 8 4 Connecting the USB cable to the Remote control receiver 2 Connect the external infrared Remote control receiver to one of the computer s USB ports Proceed to Step 3 if you are a subscriber of satellite or CATV Figure 8 5 Connecting the USB cable to the computer s USB port 3 Connect the infrared transmitter cable to the externa
270. s speakers or a headphone to get sound Connect the headphone to the computer s headphone jack Settings for display video on TV i To view video on the TV set be sure to configure the following settings otherwise you may find that nothing is displayed E Be sure to use the Fn F5 HotKey to select the display device before starting to play video Do not change the display device while playing video E Do not change the display device under the following conditions E While data is being read or written E While communication is being carried out Setting for nVIDIA GeForce Go 7300 model or GeForce Go 7600 model If a television is connected to the computer set the TV type in Display Properties Follow the steps below 1 Click start and click Control Panel 2 Double click the Display icon to open the Display Properties window 3 Click the Settings tab and click the Advanced button 4 Click the GeForce Go 7300 tab or GeForce Go 7600 tab click Current display and select TV Click Device Settings 6 Select the Select TV format and select the format that your TV supports a 9 22 User s Manual Optional Devices Changing the resolution After you connect a TV NTSC follow the steps below to set the Display resolution to 640 x 480 1 Open Display properties and select the Settings tab 2 Select Advanced 3 Select the Adapter tab then select List All Modes 4 Select 640 by 480 High Color
271. scrolling of windows Ports External monitor Analog VGA port supports VESA DDC2B compatible functions 1 6 User s Manual Introduction Universal Serial Bus USB 2 0 i LINK IEEE1394 Slots PC card ExpressCard Bridge media Multimedia Sound system TV antenna port S Video in Port S Video out port D Video out port HDMI out port The computer has Universal Serial Bus ports that comply with the USB 2 0 standard which enables data transfer speeds 40 times faster than the USB 1 1 standard The ports also support USB 1 1 This port enables high speed data transfer directly from external devices such as digital video cameras The PC card slot accommodates a 5 mm Type II card The ExpressCard slot accommodates an ExpressCard This slot lets you insert SD card Memory Stick Pro xD picture card and MultiMediaCard Refer to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Windows sound system compatible sound system provides internal speakers and microphone as well as jacks for an external microphone and headphone Built in TV Tuner is provided with some models Connect the antenna adaptor to this port to watch TV programs on your computer or record them A camcorder or other recording device can be connected to this port via the S Video in cable optional for importing video data Refer to the S Video in section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices This S Video out port lets you transfer NTSC or
272. se cables can cause signal errors Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for loose pins Check that your floppy disk or CD DVD ROM is correctly inserted and that the floppy disk s write protect tab is correctly set Make notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log This will help you describe your problems to your dealer If a problem recurs the log will help you identify the problem faster Analyzing the problem Sometimes the system gives clues that can help you identify why it is malfunctioning Keep the following questions in mind Which part of the system is not operating properly keyboard floppy disk drives hard disk drive Optical Disk Drive display Each device produces different symptoms Is the operating system configuration set properly Check the configuration options What appears on the display screen Does it display any messages or random characters If you have a printer attached print a copy of the screen using PrtSc Look up the messages in the software and operating system documentation Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached Loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals Do any indicators light Which ones What color are they Do they stay on or blink Write down what you see Do you hear any beeps How many Are they long or short Are they high pitched or low Is the computer making any unusual noises Write down
273. shall resist against interference from legal communications or from industrial scientific and medical radio emission electric machinery Using Bluetooth Card from TOSHIBA equipment in J apan In Japan the frequency bandwidth of 2 400 2 483 5 MHz for second generation low power data communication systems such as this equipment overlaps that of mobile object identification systems premises radio station and specified low power radio station 1 Sticker Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product User s Manual H 5 Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate within the same range as industrial devices scientific devices medical devices microwave ovens licensed radio stations and non licensed specified low power radio stations for mobile object identification systems RFID used in factory production lines Other Radio Stations Before using this equipment ensure that it does not interfere with any of the equipment listed above If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio stations promptly change the frequency being used change the location of use or turn off the source of emissions Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations 2 Indication The indication shown below appears on this equipment a 2 3 2 AFHI 4 1 2 4
274. side Figure 2 3 shows the computer s right side VIDEO IN port Modenviack S Video in port Security lock slot Figure 2 3 The right side of the computer VIDEO IN port With the bundled VIDEO IN cable the CATV or satellite set top boxes can be connected to the computer to view the channels Please refer to Chapter 8 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer for details on how to connect the computer with the VIDEO IN cable S Video in port A camcorder or other recording device can be connected to your computer via the S Video in cable for importing video data Connect the cable to this port for this operation Refer to the S Video in section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices Modem jack In areas where an internal modem is installed as standard equipment there is a modem jack that lets you use a modular cable to connect the modem directly to a telephone line E Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line could cause a PC system failure E Connect the built in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines E Never connect the built in modem to a digital line ISDN E Never connect the built in modem to the digital connector on a public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange PBX E Never connect the built in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices E Never operate your PC on AC power during a th
275. siseina oS nE AE a a a A aa E a a la koe 10 15 LAN iiaea eri a e ah Sindh Ea aa e E eae A a NE 10 16 Wireless LAN 0 200 eee eee eee 10 16 Bluetooth cc atone iedeieiet beebidie sd tener elees othe 10 17 TV Output Sigal ecese dune peed es pennu dast Upean y eae leans 10 17 i LINK IEEE1394 device 0 0 eee eee 10 18 Video Playback 0 0 eee tte 10 18 Disposing of PC and PC batteries 00005 10 18 TOSHIBA SUpport ces eee eee eee ee eden dee et EEE Raa 10 19 Before you call 0 2 0 2 10 19 Where to write 2 2 eee 10 20 Legal Footnotes GPU ince aias eana end eee eee aee Reece 11 1 Memory Main System 2 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 11 2 Battery Life g 3jcciiiwi tata cede E o ears EE E eas 11 2 HDD Drive Capacity 4 0 0c eee eee eee eee 11 3 LOD EEA ciara idan a anne aes Gabe megane 11 3 Graphics Processor Unit GPU 6 2 2 0 0 eee eee eee 11 3 Wireless LAN 7 0 c cece ee eee eee eee eee nnee 11 3 Non applicable Icons 8 1 1 2 0 cece eee eee 11 3 Copy Protection sii cc ccne cea ved y eared aa ua R ia 11 4 TV Tuner 10 iit ciee eccrine taal tenia eee gees 11 4 Images TT eisai eres ate tasers Mee raeneeet an Raha eee Bae wie meaner ace ae 11 4 Qosmio Player 12 0 0 00 ccc cece eee eee eee neces 11 4 LCD Brightness and Eye Stain 13 020e cece eee eee 11 4 Safety Use for TV Tuner 14 0 cece eee 11 4 xxiv User s Manual Table of Contents Appendix
276. sk drive by setting the USB FDD Legacy Emulation item to Enabled Enabled Enables the USB floppy disk drive legacy emulation function Default Disabled Disables the USB floppy disk drive legacy emulation function User s Manual 7 7 HW Setup Other settings This section explains items and procedures other than those setup using the HW Setup program Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program Notes before using the BIOS Setup In most cases changes to the system s configuration should be made within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup TOSHIBA Password Utility TOSHIBA Power Saver Windows Device Manager and so forth If you make changes to the configuration through the BIOS setup program please be aware that the configuration set through the Windows applications will take priority Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be erased even if the power supply is switched off and the main battery removed However if the built in Real Time Clock RTC battery runs out of power most of the settings will revert back to their default values However please note that the following items will not be affected in this instance mM Password Starting the BIOS Setup Program 1 Switch on your computer while pressing the Esc key If Password is displayed enter either the Supervisor Password if One is set or the user password and press the Enter key Please refe
277. sk drives can be used to construct a RAID configuration RAID 1 mirroring or RAID O Striping When using RAID 1 mirroring the data is stored on 2 HDDs so that even if there are problems with one of the hard disk drive the other hard disk drive can be used to recover the data Please refer to the TOSHIBA RAID help for details WN E By changing this setting you are reconfiguring your hard disk In which case all data and programs in the hard disk including the operating system e g Windows will be erased If you have data on the hard drive that you wish to keep make a backup of that data onto external media such as a CD now You will not be able to create recovery discs nor access any data from the hard disk after reconfiguring your hard disk E A power on password can help restrict access to your data It can also help restrict access to System Setup where some of your computer s configuration settings are kept If you do not have a power on password set someone with access to it could i set a power on password locking you out of your own computer or ii change your configuration settings which could result in data loss We recommend that you consider using a power on password User s Manual TOSHIBA RAID Windows Manual Setup Use the following procedures when manually setting up Windows Before Setting Up Windows Before setting up Windows create the TOSHIBA RAID Driver Disk and configure the BIOS set
278. smits and receives data to and from another computer or device Glossary 4 User s Manual Glossary compatibility 1 The ability of one computer to accept and process data in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data or the media upon which it is being transferred 2 the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with another system or component components Elements or parts of a system which make up the whole system Composite Video YUV A standard video signal used to transmit images e g from a VCR toa TV computer program A set of instructions written for a computer that enable it to achieve a desired result computer system A combination of hardware software firmware and peripheral components assembled to process data into useful information configuration The specific components in your system such as the terminal printer and disk drives and the settings that define how your system works You use the HW Setup program to control your system configuration control keys A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to initiate a particular function within a program controller Built in hardware and software that controls the functions of a specific internal or peripheral device e g keyboard controller co processor A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to intensive math calculations CPS Characters Per Second Typically used to indicate t
279. soft Corporation Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Sonic RecordNow and Sonic PrimeTime are registered trademarks of Sonic Solutions Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA under license Memory Stick is a registered trademark and i LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of the InterVideo Inc WinDVD Creator is trademarks of the InterVideo Inc Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved EdgeMotion PalmCheck TouchPad and Synaptics are trademarks or registered trademarks of Synaptics Incorporated Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used in this manual Macrovision License This product includes copyright protection technology and intellectual property that are patented in the U S and other countries These patents are the property of Macrovision Corporation The use of copyright protection must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation It is intended for home and other restricted use applications unless Macrovision Corporation expressly authorizes otherwise All forms of reverse engineering or decompiling are forbidden FCC information Product Name Qosmio G30 Model number PQG30 User s Manual iii User s Manual FCC
280. ssing this button to display the dialog for using the functions of Dolby Home Theater which contains Dolby For more information on using the Dolby refer to its help which is displayed on clicking the F1 key on the Dolby dialog The button setting can be changed in TOSHIBA Controls properties To access the TOSHIBA Controls properties click start click the Control Panel click Printers and the Software and select the TOSHIBA Controls icon Pressing this button while Windows is running will switch the display output to a TV The button setting can be changed in TOSHIBA Controls properties To access the TOSHIBA Controls properties click start click the Control Panel click Printers and the Software and select the TOSHIBA Controls icon User s Manual 8 3 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Icon A SE L U m l lt lt vO AO DOLBY Cp Windows Media Center Edition Front operation Media Center button TV CD DVD Play Pause Stop Previous Next Rec Brightness Brightness DOLBY TV out My TV TV Run Media Center and My TV is displayed Manual Recording is displayed Media Center Play DVD DVD Run Media Center and play DVD Run CD DVD player or Play Pause Stop Previous chapter Next chapter Media Center My Music CD Run Media Center and My Music is displayed Run CD DVD player or Play Paus
281. sters S registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions of the internal modem operate For example how many times to let the telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it hangs up if a connection fails You can also customize certain AT commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify corresponding settings in your communication software If you choose however you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually when the modem is in command mode If the value is out of the acceptable range then an error is generated This chapter describes the settings for each S register S register values The format for displaying the value of an S register is ATSn where n is the register number After you type in the register press Enter The format for modifying the value of an S register is ATSn r where n is the register number and r is the new register value After you type in the register and its new value press Enter Some registers vary from one country region to another pmi o SO Auto answer ring number This register determines the number of rings the modem will count before automatically answering a call Enter 0 zero if you do not want the modem to automatically answer at all When disabled the modem can only answer with an ATA command Range 0 255 Default 0 Units rings
282. sure it is occurs firmly connected Check the card s documentation You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the xD picture card inserted in the slot If problems persist contact your dealer MultiMediaCard Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem Procedure MultiMediaCard error Reseat the MultiMediaCard to make sure it is occurs firmly connected Check the MultiMediaCard s documentation You cannot write toan Make sure the MultiMediaCard is not write MultiMediaCard protected You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the MultiMediaCard inserted in the slot If problems persist contact your dealer Infrared receiver window Refer also to the documentation for your infrared compatible device and related software Problem Procedure Infrared devices do Make sure there is no obstruction blocking not work as expected communication between the computer and the target device If problems persist contact your dealer User s Manual 10 11 Troubleshooting Pointing device If you are using a USB mouse also refer to the USB section in this chapter and to your mouse documentation Touch Pad Problem Procedure On screen pointer The system might be busy If the pointer is does not respond to shaped as an hourglass wait for it to return to its Pad operation normal shape and try again to move it Double tapping does Try changing the double click speed setting in not work the
283. sword Utility are different from the Windows password User password To start the utility point to or click the following items Il start gt All Programs gt TOSHIBA gt Utilities gt Password Utility Set button Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters After a password is set you will be prompted to enter it when you start the computer After you set the password a dialog box will be displayed asking whether you want to save it to a floppy disk or other media If you forget the password you can open the password file on another computer Be sure to keep the media in a safe place When entering the character string to register the password enter from the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or copy and paste the character string In addition ensure that the registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the password file Delete button Click this button to delete a registered password Before you can delete a password you must first enter the current password correctly 6 14 User s Manual Power E Change button Click this button to change a registered password Before you can change a password you must first enter the current password correctly E Owner String text box You can use this box to associate text with the password After you enter the text click Apply or OK When you switch the computer on this text will be
284. t USB port IEEE1394 port HDMI out port and microphone jack Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FCC conditions This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Contact Address TOSHIBA America Information Systems Inc 9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine California 92618 1697 Telephone 949 583 3000 User s Manual User s Manual EU Declaration of Conformity TOSHIBA declares that the product PQG30 conforms to the following Standards Supplementary The product complies with the requirements of Information the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and or the R amp TTE Directive 1999 05 EEC This product is carrying the CE Mark in accordance with the related European Directives Responsible for CE Marking is TOSHIBA Europe Hammfelddamm 8 41460 Neuss Germany VCCI Class B Information COREL FRUBRESERRSAERHMBS VCCI ORE CHOC DSIABERRNRE CY CORBIS RERRCHATS CE EAMWELTHOETA CORBMIUAPTLEDV a VRC LT ASHE L SSCS SRCTCEMBVET Axiant HS IIE gt TIELUY ERY RUALTR SL Harmonic Information CORMAIIS C 61000 3 238 8m
285. t for Ethernet LAN 10 megabits per second 10BASE T Fast Ethernet LAN 100 megabits per second 100BASE TX and Gigabit Ethernet LAN 1000 megabits per second 1000BASE T The LAN has two indicators Refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics for details LAN jack This jack lets you connect to a LAN The adaptor 2 6 User s Manual The Grand Tour JN E Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack It could cause damage or malfunction E Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply It could cause damage or malfunction Link indicator green LAN active indicator orange Universal om Serial Bus USB 2 0 ports External monitor C port D D Video out port Hormi HDMI out port This indicator glows green when the computer is connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning properly This indicator glows orange when data is being exchanged between the computer and the LAN Two Universal Serial Bus ports are on the back side Refer to Left side section for details This external monitor port lets you connect an external video display This D Video out port lets you transfer 525i 480i 525p 480p 1125i 1080i or 750p 720p data to external devices Refer to TV section in Chapter 9 Optional Devices HDMI out port can connect with Type A connector HDMI cable One HDMI cable can send and receive video audio and control signals The computer is equipped with either an H
286. talling the Hard disk drive pack 002 e ee eee eee 9 17 USB floppy disk drive 0 c eee eee 9 18 Using the USB floppy disk drive 0 00 eee eee 9 19 External monitor 2 0 cece eee eee 9 20 TV cceeee tens ntd edie tind Osewedoeratewe ee EE R 9 21 Installations cc ese ed whee ee bed oe dee ae ea eed 9 21 Settings for display video ON TV 0 000 cee eee ee eee 9 22 Changing the resolution 2 0 2 0 0 0 c eee eee 9 23 HDMI ssip aan ed SEQ Gane ee eee ad esdied bees 9 23 Settings for display video on HDMI 000000000 9 24 Displaying movies on a External display device 9 24 VIDEO ING geo ig oi ee oe ELE ed Lebel O ba ai 9 25 S VIdCO IN iio ie cence need eee ee eee ee eee eee reeks 9 25 Model without the TV Tuner 0 00 e eee ee eee 9 26 LLINK IEEE1394 00 050 0ce0scee deetieenseewees ceiwaaee 9 26 PRECAUTIONS eitea i dat ho bad boa bo does bed eS 9 26 Connecting sasssa A amp Sadie Sand S4i Mac E Rata ee 9 27 DISCONNECHNG seres suree idea ee baa ied ee ead Che es 9 27 Bluetooth USB Adaptor 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 9 27 Bluetooth Wireless Mouse 00 eee e eee eee eee eee 9 28 Bluetooth Wireless Stereo 0 0c cece eee eee eee 9 28 Bluetooth 2 0 EDR Module Kit 00 e eee e eee 9 28 Security lock je cc0si c00e pes eves ea ed Sete ee yeaa pees 9 28 Troubleshooting Problem solving proCeSS 00sec eee eee e
287. tate tariffs If you have any questions about your telephone line such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it the telephone company will provide this information upon request Telephone company procedures The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can In order to do this it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment operations or procedures If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment the telephone company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service If problems arise If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network If the telephone company notes a problem they may temporarily discontinue service When practical they will notify you in advance of this disconnection If advance notice is not feasible you will be notified as soon as possible When you are notified you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC In the event repairs are ever needed on your modem they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation Disconnection If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its present line please ca
288. technology like other radio devices emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy The level of energy emitted by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is safe for use by consumers These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature In some situations or environments the use of Bluetooth wireless technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization These situations may for example include E Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of airplanes or E In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment e g airports you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment Regulatory statements General Thi
289. tery pack Improper installation could generate smoke or fire or cause the battery pack to rupture User s Manual 6 7 Power 16 Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children It can cause injury Caution 1 2 Use only battery packs recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements When installing a battery pack or before moving the PC always make sure the battery pack is inserted correctly and securely If the battery falls out while you are carrying the PC you could be injured or the battery pack could be damaged Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and 35 degrees Celsius Otherwise the electrolyte solution might leak battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might be shortened Never continue to use a battery pack after its recharging capability has become impaired or after the warning message indicating that the battery pack power is exhausted has been displayed Continued use of an exhausted or impaired battery pack could result in the loss of data or damage to PC Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the power and disconnecting the AC adaptor Never remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode Data will be lost Note 1 Never remove the battery pack while the Wake up on LAN function is enabled Data will be lost Before you remove a battery pack disable the Wake up on LAN function Never remo
290. tery pack Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6 Power for details 10 Turn your computer over Battery Packs You can increase the portability of the computer with additional standard or high capacity battery packs If you re away from an AC power source and your battery runs low you can replace it with a freshly charged battery Refer to Chapter 6 Power Universal AC Adaptor If you frequently transport the computer between different sites such as your home and office purchasing an AC adaptor for each location will reduce the weight and bulk of your carrying load Battery Charger The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge battery packs without requiring the use of your computer The battery charger holds up to two lithium ion battery packs Hard disk drive pack An extra hard disk drive expands the flexibility of your system and lets you carry your data without carrying the computer 1 Use a 0 point Phillips screwdriver for the task described here Removing the Hard disk drive pack To remove the Hard disk drive pack follow the steps below 1 Set the computer to boot mode and turn off the power 2 Disconnect the AC adaptor and all external cables connected to the computer 3 Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6 Power for details 4 Loosen one screw securing the Hard disk drive cover 9 16 Us
291. the icon size on the desktop or the application window press the 1 key while holding down the Fn key aga TOSHIBA Zooming Utility enlarge To enlarge the icon size on the desktop or the application window press the 2 key while holding down the Fn key Fn Sticky key You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the Fn key sticky that is you can press it once release it and then press an F number key To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Utilities and click Accessibility Windows special keys The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows Windows logo key activates the start menu and the other the application key has the same function as the secondary mouse button Ay Ay This key activates the Windows start menu i This key has the same function as the secondary mouse button 5 6 User s Manual The Keyboard Keypad overlay Your computer s keyboard does not have an independent numeric keypad but its numeric keypad overlay functions like one The keys in the center of the keyboard with gray letters make up the numeric keypad overlay The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric keypad on the 101 102 key enhanced keyboard in figure 5 2 Turning on the overlays The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor and page control Arrow mode To turn o
292. to AM Amharic ES Spanish Abyssinian Castilian AR Arabic ET Estonian AS Assamese EU Basque AY Aymara FA Farsi Persian AZ Azerbaijani Fl Finnish BA Bashkir FJ Fijiian BE Belarusian FO Faroese Byelorussian Faeroese BG Bulgarian FR French BH Bihari FY Frisian Bl Bislama GA Irish BN Bengali GD Gaelic Bangla Scottish Gaelic Gaelic Scots BO Tibetan GL Galician Gallegan BR Breton GN Guarani CA Catalan GU Gujarati CO Corsican HA Hausa CS Czech HI Hindi CY Welsh HR Croatian DA Danish HU Hungarian DE German HY Armenian DZ Dzongkha IA Interlingua Bhutani Butanese 8 26 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer KA KK KL KM KN KO KS KU KY LA LN LO LT LV MG English Name of Language Interlingue Inupiaq Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Kalaallisut Khmer Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kyrgyz Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laotian Lao Lithuanian Latvian Lettish Malagasy Code MI MK ML MN MO MR MS MT MY NA NE NL NO OC OM OR PA PL PS PT QU RM RN RO English Name of Language Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Myanmar Burmese Nauruan Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan Provencal Oromo Afan Oromo Galla Oriya Punjabi Panjabi Polish Pashto
293. tput by the sending computer is input for the receiving computer instruction Statements or commands that specify how to perform a particular task interface 1 Hardware and or software components of a system used specifically to connect one system or device to another 2 To physically connect one system or device to another to exchange information 3 The point of contact between user the computer and the program for example the keyboard or a menu Glossary 8 User s Manual Glossary interrupt request A signal that gives a component access to the processor I O Input output Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and froma computer I O devices Equipment used to communicate with the computer and transfer data to and from it IrDA 1 1 An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps jumper A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit K K Taken from the Greek word kilo meaning 1000 often used as equivalent to 1024 or 2 raised to the 10th power See also byte and kilobyte KB See kilobyte keyboard An input device containing switches that are activated by manually pressing marked keys Each keystroke activates a switch that transmits a specific code to the computer For each key the transmitted code is in turn representative of the ASCII character mar
294. turn it off until you J have set up the operating system Refer to the section Starting up for the first time E f the USB floppy disk drive is connected make sure it is empty If a floppy disk is in the drive press the eject button and remove the floppy disk 1 Open the computer s LCD display panel User s Manual 3 9 Getting Started 2 Press and hold the computer s power button for two or three seconds Power button Figure 3 6 Turning on the power Starting up for the first time When you first turn on the power the computer s initial screen is the Microsoft Windows XP Startup Screen Logo Follow the on screen directions for each screen During setup you can click the Back button to return to the previous screen F Be sure to read the Windows End User License Agreement display I carefully Turning off the power The power can be turned off in one of the following modes Shut down Boot Hibernation or Standby mode Shut Down mode Boot mode When you turn off the power in Shut Down mode no data is saved and the computer will boot to the operating system s main screen 1 If you have entered data save it to the hard disk or to a floppy disk 2 Make sure all disk disc activity has stopped then remove the CD DVDs or floppy disk JN E Make sure the HDD indicator is off If you turn off the power while a disk disc is being accessed you can lose data or damage the disk disc E Ne
295. turn it to its case H Do not touch the metal part or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro AN J The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro flash memory cards with various memory capacities Memory Stick let you easily transfer data from devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants that use Memory Stick technology Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury E The slot does not support Magic Gate functions E Memory Stick Duo PRO Duo and the Memory Stick adaptor are not compatible with the Bridge media slot Do not insert Memory Stick Duo PRO Duo into the slot Data may be lost or damaged if you use any card other than those supported User s Manual 9 7 Optional Devices A Write protection Memory Stick can be write protected to safeguard your data To write protect a Memory Stick slide the lock on the back of the Memory Stick to the lock position Inserting a Memory Stick To insert a Memory Stick follow the steps below 1 Insert the Memory Stick into the Bridge media slot 2 Press gently to ensure a firm connection Bridge media slot Figure 9 7 Inserting a Me
296. ty for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions In particular the higher speeds at which this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high quality voice telephony to customers Failure to operate should not be reported as a fault to Telecom In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work properly if E itis compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and E the application using the modem is compatible with the application at the other end of the call e g accessing the Internet requires suitable software in addition to a modem This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s PTC Specifications are dependent on the equipment PC associated with this modem The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications E There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and E The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5 seconds apart Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become ph
297. typewriter and using a computer keyboard E Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width Spaces which are created by a space character may also vary depending on line justification and other factors E The lowercase el and the number 1 one are not interchangeable on computers as they are on a typewriter E The uppercase O oh and the 0 zero are not interchangeable E The Caps Lock function key locks only the alphabetic characters in uppercase while the shift lock on a typewriter places all keys in the shifted position E The Shift keys the Tab key and the BkSp backspace key perform the same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special computer functions User s Manual The Keyboard Function keys Fl F12 The function keys not to be confused with Fn are the 12 keys at the top of your keyboard These keys function differently from other keys FA E E ee G g f G IE n Fa a e on se 3 0 vo Ad tp 2 2 E a F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute programmed functions when pressed Used in combination with the Fn key keys marked with icons execute specific functions on the computer Refer to the section Soft keys Fn key combinations in this chapter The function executed by individual keys depends on the software you are using Soft keys Fn key combinations The Fn function is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in combinatio
298. ual help files or readme txt files TOSHIBA Power Saver HW Setup TOSHIBA Controls To access this power savings management program click start click the Control Panel click Performance and Maintenance and click the TOSHIBA Power Saver icon This program lets you customize your hardware settings according to the way you work with your computer and the peripherals you use To start the utility click start and click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and click the TOSHIBA HWSetup icon This utility lets you do the following E Buttons Assign applications to the REC Brightness down Brightness up DOLBY TV out buttons User s Manual Introduction Fingerprint utility Fn esse DVD Video Player TOSHIBA Picture Enhancement Utility TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA Assist TOSHIBA Zooming Utility This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints By enrolling the ID and password to the fingerprint authentication device it is no longer necessary to input the password from the keyboard Just by swiping the finger against the fingerprint sensor the following functions will be enabled E Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through IE Internet Explorer E Files and folders can be encrypted decrypted and third party access to them prevented E Disable the password protected screen saver when returning fro
299. ual Mode Pad You can create CD DVDs in several formats including audio CDs that can be played ona standard stereo CD player and data CD DVDs to store the files and folders on your hard disk drive This software can be used on a model with DVD Super Multi drive DLA Drive Letter Access is the packet writing software which provides the function which writes files and or folders to DVD RW CD RW and DVD RW discs via a drive letter like a floppy disk or other removable disks This utility has the change of a display device and the function to change display resolution Press Fn F5 to change the active display device Press Fn Space keys to change the display resolution TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool displays the basic information on the computer s configuration and allows some of the built in devices functionality to be tested To start TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Utility and click PC Diagnostic Tool This software enables communication between remote Bluetooth devices Bluetooth cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth module The DualMode TouchPad is a TouchPad that provides normal Synaptics features in its default mode and switches to a DualMode interface when the upper right corner of the TouchPad is tapped Tapping the same corner again will revert to normal pointing mode The volume control on the right side of the Touch Pad and print button may
300. uch as an analog video camera or game machine on the LCD of your computer while Windows is running by connecting such device to the S Video in port of your computer i LINK IEEE1394 1 i LINK IEEE1394 is used for high speed data transfer for a range of compatible devices such as E Digital video cameras E Hard disk drives E MO drives E Writable optical disc drives i LINK uses a four pin connector which does not carry any electric current External devices will need their own power supply to operate Precautions E Make a back up of your data before transferring it to the computer There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged There is a particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital video transfer TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data E Do nottransfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated or in areas subjected to electronic noise Data can be destroyed E Ifyou are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub do not connect or disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer There is a likelihood that data will be damaged Connect all devices to the hub before you turn on the computer s power E You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a video camera except for your personal enjoyment E f you connect disconnect an i LINK device to from another i LINK device that is currently exchanging data with the computer dat
301. under certain conditions may result in data loss E Before you install a device or application save any data in memory to the hard disk drive or other storage media Failure to do so may result in the loss of data Connecting the AC adaptor Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to operate from AC power It is also the fastest way to get started because the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from battery power The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100 to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz For details on using the AC adaptor to charge the battery pack refer to Chapter 6 Power 3 6 User s Manual Getting Started JN E Always use the Toshiba AC adaptor that was provided with your PC and the Toshiba Battery Charger that may have been provided with your PC or use Toshiba recommended alternate models to avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the PC Use of an incompatible AC adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC possibly resulting in serious injury E Use only the AC adaptor supplied with your computer or an equivalent adaptor that is compatible Use of any incompatible adaptor could damage your computer TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an incompatible adaptor E Never plug the AC adaptor or Battery Charger into a power source that does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency
302. understorm If you see lightning or hear thunder immediately turn off the PC An electric surge caused by the storm may result in a system failure loss of data or hardware damage User s Manual 2 5 The Grand Tour MOC Security lock slot A security cable attaches to this slot The optional security cable anchors your computer to a desk or other large object to deter theft Back side Figure 2 4 shows the computer s back side LAN active indicator Link indicator green orange LAN jack TV antenna port USB ports D Video out port HDMI out port a ih DC IN 15V jack Cooling vents External monitor port S Video out port Figure 2 4 The back side of the computer TV antenna port TV antenna port is provided with some models Connect the antenna adaptor to this port to watch TV programs on your computer or record them DC IN 15V jack The AC adaptor connects to this jack Use only D the model of AC adaptor that comes with the e NAN computer Using the wrong adaptor can damage your computer Cooling vents Cooling vents help CPU keep from overheating JN Do not block the cooling vents Never allow metal objects such as screws staples and paper clips to enter the PC or keyboard Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit which can cause PC damage and fire possibly resulting in serious injury has built in suppor
303. up program Creating the TOSHIBA RAID Driver Disk 1 2 3 4 Connect the USB floppy disk drive and insert a floppy disk From the start menu select TOSHIBA Application Installer and click the Next button Select the TOSHIBA RAID Driver and click the Install button Specify the folder and click the Unzip button The driver file will be copied to the floppy disk Configuring the BIOS Setup Program In the RAID ARRAY setting of the BIOS setup program set the built in HDD to 1RAID 0 It is not necessary to change the setting if it has already been set as such Refer to the Starting Modifying and Ending the BIOS Setup Program in this chapter Windows Setup Procedure 1 Insert the Windows Setup CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and boot up The Windows Setup program will start When the message Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver appears on the screen press the F6 key When the message Setup will load support for the following mass storage device s appears on the screen press the S key and install the TOSHIBA RAID Driver using the TOSHIBA RAID Driver Disk that was created Follow the onscreen instructions to continue Windows setup Please use only hard disk drives supported by the computer Correct operations cannot be guaranteed if other hard disk drives are used The following types of applications might not work correctly E Applications that directly access the hardware
304. urns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal amp C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored DCD circuit is always on amp C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem s carrier signal is detected and off when the carrier signal is not detected default Result Codes OK n 0 1 ERROR Otherwise amp Dn DTR control This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR signal and changes to the DTR signal amp DO Ignore The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats itas always on This should only be used if your communication software does not provide DTR to the modem amp D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on line data mode the modem enters command mode issues an OK result code and remains connected C 6 User s Manual AT Commands amp F amp Gn amp Kn amp Pn amp D2 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on line data mode the modem disconnects default amp D3 Reset on the on to off DTR transition Result Codes OK n 0 1 2 3 ERROR Otherwise Load factory settings This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the factory This operation replaces all of the command options and the S register settings in the active configuration with factory values amp F Recall factory setting as active configuration V 22bis guard tone control This command determines which guard tone if any to transmit while
305. used the numbers should be entered normally The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal Before reporting such occurrences as faults please check the line with a standard Telepermitted telephone and only report a fault if the phone performance is impaired It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the Telecom line during electrical storms When relocating the equipment always disconnect the Telecom line connection before the power connection and reconnect the power first This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert cadences and services such as FaxAbility NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM xii User s Manual User s Manual General conditions As required by PTC 100 please ensure that this office is advised of any changes to the specifications of these products which might affect compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork The Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without Telecom approval A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions on format size an
306. used by your setup configuration For more information refer to Chapter 5 The Keyboard Problem Procedure Some letter keys Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not produce numbers selected Press Fn F10 and try typing again Output to screen is Make sure the software you are using is not garbled remapping the keyboard Remapping involves reassigning the meaning of each key See your software s documentation If you are still unable to use the keyboard consult your dealer Internal LCD display panel Apparent LCD problems may be related to the computer s setup Refer to Chapter 7 HW Setup for more information Problem Procedure No display Press hotkeys Fn F5 to change the display priority to make sure it is not set for an external monitor Markings appear on the The marks may have come from contact with the LCD screen keyboard or Touch Pad Try wiping the LCD screen gently with a clean dry cloth If markings remain use a good quality LCD screen cleaner taking care to ensure you let the LCD screen dry before closing it Problems above Refer to your software s documentation to remain unresolved or determine if the software is causing the difficulty other problems occur Contact your dealer if the problems continue User s Manual 10 7 Troubleshooting Hard disk drive Problem Computer does not boot from hard disk drive Slow performance DVD Super Multi drive Procedure Check if a
307. used to edit a command line When the echo command is enabled the modem echoes back to the local DTE the backspace character an ASCII space character and a second backspace character This means a total of three characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the backspace character Range 0 127 ASCII decimal Default 8 backspace Units ASCII S6 Wait before dialing This register sets the length of time in seconds that the modem must wait pause after going off hook before dialing the first digit of the telephone number The modem always pauses for a minimum of two seconds even if the value of S6 is less that two seconds The wait for dial tone call progress feature W dial modifier in the dial string will override the value in register S6 This operation however may be affected by some ATX options according to country region restrictions In some countries regions S6 will set dial tone detect time Range 3 255 Default 3 Units seconds S7 Connection completion time out This register sets the time in seconds that the modem must wait before hanging up because carrier is not detected The timer is started when the modem finishes dialing originate or goes off hook answer In originate mode the timer is reset upon detection of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction The timer also specifies the wait for silence time for the dial modifier in seconds S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier Ran
308. ve or other devices 6 Data may be lost if the floppy disk is twisted bent or exposed to direct sunlight extreme heat or cold 7 Do not place heavy objects on your floppy disks 4 22 User s Manual Operating Basics 8 Do not eat smoke or use erasers near your floppy disks Foreign particles inside the floppy disk s jacket can damage the magnetic surface 9 Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy disks Keep your floppy disks away from speakers radios television sets and other sources of magnetic fields TV Tuner i Use the My TV feature of Media Center in Windows mode to watch TV programs or record them According to the government regulations it is not permitted to bring PAL SECAM TV tuners into Korea Using the TV Tuner Antenna E The quality of sounds and pictures greatly depends on the radio propagation conditions mM When you use your computer in areas where the radio waves are weak which results in poor radio receiving conditions contact the dealer you purchased it from or use a commercially available antenna booster Please refer to the manual provided with the booster for details Connecting the Cable ZX Use the antenna adaptor that comes with the product to connect the antenna to your computer Connecting the antenna adaptor When lightning occurs do not touch the antenna line This may cause an electric shock If you have to operate your comput
309. ve the battery pack while the Wake up on Wireless LAN function is enabled Data will be lost Before you remove a battery pack disable the Wake up on Wireless LAN function To ensure the battery pack maintains maximum capacity operate the computer on battery power once a week until the battery pack is fully discharged Refer to the section Extending battery life in this chapter for procedures If the computer is continuously operated on AC power for an extended period more than a week the battery might fail to retain a charge It might not function efficiently over the expected life of the battery pack and the Battery indicator might not indicate a low battery condition After the battery pack is charged avoid leaving the AC adaptor connected and the computer turned off for more than a few hours at a time Continuing to charge a fully charged battery pack can damage the battery Charging the batteries When the power in the battery pack becomes low the Battery indicator flashes orange indicating that only a few minutes of battery power remain If you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes the computer enables Hibernation mode so you don t lose data and automatically turns off 6 8 User s Manual Power pmi o pmi o The computer enters Hibernate mode only if Hibernation is enabled in two places the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup Action tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver You must rechar
310. ver connect the built in modem to a key telephone system for residences or offices E Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm If you see lightning or hear thunder immediately turn off the PC An electric surge caused by the storm may result in a system failure loss of data or hardware damage Region selection AN pmi o Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another so you will need to make sure the internal modem s settings are correct for the region in which it will be used The built in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system failure Check the specified areas carefully before using it To select a region follow the steps below 1 Click start point to All Programs point to TOSHIBA point to Networking and click Modem Region Select Do not use the Country Region Select function in the Modem setup utility in the Control Panel if the function is available If you change the Country Region in the Control Panel the change may not take effect 2 The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Task Bar Click the icon with the primary mouse button to display a list of regions that the modem supports A sub menu for telephony location information will also be displayed A check will appear next to the currently selected region and telephony location 3 Select a region from the region menu or a telepho
311. ver turn off the power while an application is running Doing so could cause loss of data E Never turn off the power disconnect an external storage device or remove storage media during data read write Doing so can cause data loss 3 10 User s Manual Getting Started 3 4 Click start then click Turn Off Computer From the Turn Off Computer menu Select Turn Off Turn off the power to any peripheral devices Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately Wait a moment to let all capacitors fully discharge Standby Mode If you have to interrupt your work you can turn off the power without exiting from your software Data is maintained in the computer s main memory When you turn on the power again you can continue working right where you left off pmi o When the AC adaptor is connected the computer will go into Standby mode according to the settings in the TOSHIBA Power Saver utility To restore operation from Standby Mode press the power button or press any key The latter action only works on the internal keyboard if the Wake up on Keyboard option is enabled in HW Setup If the computer automatically enters Standby mode while a network application is active the application might not be restored when the computer wakes up from Standby To prevent the computer from automatically entering Standby mode disable Standby in TOSHIBA Power Saver That action however will nullify the computer s E
312. ware configuration matches your software s needs Check the CD DVD s documentation 10 8 User s Manual Troubleshooting Check the type of CD DVD you are using The drive supports DVD ROM DVD ROM DVD Video CD ROM CD DA CD Text Photo CD single multi session CD ROM Mode 1 Mode 2 CD ROM XA Mode 2 Form1 Form2 Enhanced CD CD EXTRA Addressing Method 2 Check the region code on the DVD It must match that on the DVD Super Multi drive Region codes are listed in the Optical Disk Drives section in Chapter 2 The Grand Tour USB floppy disk drive The USB floppy disk drive is available only as an option For more information refer to Chapter 4 Operating Basics Problem Procedure Drive does not operate There may be a faulty cable connection Check the connection to the computer and to the drive You cannot access the Try another floppy disk If you can access the external USB floppy floppy disk the original floppy disk not the drive disk drive is probably causing the problem If problems persist contact your dealer PC card Refer also to Chapter 9 Optional Devices Problem Procedure PC card error occurs Reseat the PC card to make sure it is firmly connected Make sure the connection between the external device and the PC card is firm Check the PC card s documentation If problems persist contact your dealer User s Manual 10 9 Troubleshooting ExpressCard Refer
313. what you hear Record your observations so you can describe them to your dealer 10 2 User s Manual Troubleshooting Software The problems may be caused by your software or disk If you cannot load a software package the media may be damaged or the program might be corrupted Try loading another copy of the software If an error message appears while you are using a software package check the software documentation These documents usually include a problem solving section or a summary of error messages Next check any error messages in the operating system documentation Hardware If you cannot find a software problem check your hardware First run through the items in the preliminary checklist above If you still cannot correct the problem try to identify the source The next section provides checklists for individual components and peripherals JN Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an authorized Toshiba part or product make sure the device or software can be used with your PC Use of incompatible devices may cause injury or may damage your PC Hardware and system checklist This section discusses problems caused by your computer s hardware or attached peripherals Basic problems may occur in the following areas Memory Stick Memory Stick Pro xD picture card MultiMediaCard i LINK IEEE1394 device Video Playback E System start up E Infrared receiver window E Self test
314. wiping please do it slowly and at a constant speed If this does not improve the authentication rate please adjust the speed E f there are any changes in the environment or settings related to authorization you will be required to provide authorization information such as the User BIOS Password and the HDD Password How to Enable Fingerprint Power on Security Settings It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Power on Security System Check that your fingerprint is enrolled before configuring the settings See Manual for Fingerprint Registration Enrollment instructions 1 Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor 2 MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen Swipe your finger on the Fingerprint Sensor and select Control Center from the MENU items 3 The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed Click Settings and click Power on Security 4 The Power on Security screen is displayed Place a checkmark in Replace the power on and hard drive passwords with the fingerprint reader and click OK Fingerprint Single Sign On Feature General This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both the User BIOS Password and optionally HDD Password and logging on to Windows using only one fingerprint authentication when booting up It is necessary to register the User BIOS Password and Wind
315. x8 256 of 256K 70 Grph Pels User s Manual B 3 Display Controller and Modes Table 3 Video modes WXGA 1 E Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor E The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases Resolution LCD CRT Vertical colors colors frequency Hz 640 x 480 256 256K 256 256K 60 800 x 600 256 256K 256 256K 60 1024 x 768 256 256K 256 256K 60 1280 x 1024 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 75 1400 x 900 256 256K 256 256K 65 1600 x 1200 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 2 75 1920 x 1440 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 75 2048 x 1536 256 256K 256 256K 60 Virtual 2 75 1 The 1440 x 900 resolution is only available in LCD LCD CRT and LCD TV display devices 2 Only when displaying on LCD 3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT JN E Some video modes do not support multimonitor display E The above table shows typical display modes B 4 User s Manual Display Controller and Modes Table 3 Video modes WXGA continued Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor E The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while running 3D applications during DVD playback etc Reduce the resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases Resolution LCD CRT Ve
316. xternal devices such as TV video deck or analog video camera 8 14 User s Manual Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Connecting the set top box 1 Connect the VIDEO IN cable that is found in the bundled package to the computer 2 Insert the output cable plug for connecting to the set top box to the audio input terminals red audio right white audio left and the video input connector yellow of the VIDEO IN cable 3 Connect the other end of the output cable plug to the output terminals of the set top box Use the bundled VIDEO IN cable and connect to VIDEO IN port on the right side of the computer CATV cable e sold separately AV cable sold separately F o 5 z Coaxial cable sold separately y Figure 8 12 Connection method for the computer and set top box in MCE model Starting for watch the TV Perform the following procedures to watch TV 1 Activate Media Center 2 Activate MV TV For details on operating method refer to the Help in Media Center J Image data cannot be imported edited watched or saved to DVD by connecting the Media Center Edition model to external devices such as TV video deck or analog video camera User s Manual 8 15 Using the Remote Controller Front operation button and QosmioPlayer Connecting the VIDEO IN port This port allows you to import video data from analog video cameras
317. you can E Physically destroy the HDD E Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data E Take the HDD to a professional deletion service All data deletion costs will be borne by you TOSHIBA support If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having problems operating the computer you may need to contact TOSHIBA for additional technical assistance Before you call Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating system it is important to investigate other sources of assistance first Before contacting TOSHIBA try the following Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation for software and peripheral devices If a problem occurs when you are running software applications consult the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions Call the software company s technical support for assistance Consult the dealer you purchased your computer and or software from They are your best sources for current information and support User s Manual 10 19 Troubleshooting Where to write If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware related write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below Outside of Europe Australia TOSHIBA Australia Pty Ltd Information Systems Division 84 92 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Sydney Canada TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd 191 McNabb Street Markham Ontario L3R 8H2
318. ysically damaged and arrange for its disposal or repair The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as follows ATBO CCITT operation AT amp G2 1800 Hz guard tone AT amp P1 Decadic dialing make break ratio 33 67 ATSO 0 not auto answer ATS6 4 Blind dial delay ATS7 less than 90 Time to wait to carrier after dialing ATS10 less than 150 loss of carrier to hangup delay factory default of 15 recommended ATS11 90 DTMF dialing on off duration 90 ms ATX2 Dial tone detect but not U S A call progress detect User s Manual xi User s Manual When used in the Auto Answer mode the SO register must be set with a value of 3 or 4 This ensures E aperson calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before the modem answers This confirms that the call has been successfully switched through the network E caller identification information which occurs between the first and second ring cadences is not destroyed The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones ATDT as this is faster and more reliable than pulse decadic dialing If for some reason you must use decadic dialing your communications program must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table as this modem does not implement the New Zealand Reverse Dialing standard Number to be dialed 0 123456789 Number to program into computer 0987654321 Note that where DTMF dialing is
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Philips BDP7700 Samsung WD12F9C9U4W/EU Manuel de l'utilisateur le CHESSEP - Bibliothèques de l`Université de Lorraine ZG106R English Manual PROTOCOLE DE NETTOYAGE DES LAMES Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file